1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \begin_inset Note Note
211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
212 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
213 \begin_inset Newline newline
218 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
226 \begin_layout Standard
227 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
228 LatexCommand tableofcontents
235 \begin_layout Chapter
239 \begin_layout Section
240 What is \SpecialChar LyX
244 \begin_layout Standard
246 is a document preparation system.
247 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
248 scripts, publishable books, business
249 letters and proposals,
250 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
254 It is unlike most other
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
264 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
280 pt type, left justified, 5
281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
290 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
294 \begin_layout Standard
295 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
300 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
304 \begin_layout Standard
309 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
310 's philosophy: most importantly,
311 the format of all of the manuals.
312 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
313 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
314 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
317 \begin_layout Section
322 \begin_layout Standard
323 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
324 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
326 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
327 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
333 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
334 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
336 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
337 only a vertical scrollbar.
340 \begin_layout Standard
341 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
342 The first case is large images.
343 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
344 the image and use the option
355 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
358 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
361 \begin_layout Standard
362 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
363 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
371 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
378 \begin_layout Section
382 \begin_layout Standard
383 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
385 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
387 Just select the manual you want to read from the
394 \begin_layout Section
395 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
399 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
406 \begin_layout Standard
407 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
408 can be configured via the menu
410 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
414 \begin_inset Index idx
417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
424 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
426 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
427 packages are available.
428 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
430 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
431 was installed on your system,
432 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
437 \begin_inset space \space{}
440 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
441 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
443 To force \SpecialChar LyX
444 to re-inspect your system use
446 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
450 \begin_inset Index idx
453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
454 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
460 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
461 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
464 \begin_layout Section
467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
469 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
476 \begin_layout Standard
477 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
478 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 installed but you will not be
481 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
482 or print your documents
486 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
487 Some \SpecialChar LyX
488 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
497 which can produce PDFs and the like.
500 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
502 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
505 every \SpecialChar LyX
506 document can still be output as plain text
507 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
513 \begin_layout Standard
514 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
520 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
521 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
524 \begin_layout Standard
525 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
526 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
527 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
530 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
538 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
539 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
546 \begin_inset Index idx
549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
558 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
565 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
569 \begin_layout Chapter
570 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
574 \begin_layout Section
575 Basic File Operations
576 \begin_inset Index idx
579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
588 \begin_layout Standard
593 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
594 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
597 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
635 arg "buffer-new-template"
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
675 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
689 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
705 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
715 \begin_layout Itemize
737 \begin_layout Itemize
749 arg "buffer-write-as"
753 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
757 \begin_layout Itemize
759 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
775 \begin_layout Itemize
789 \begin_layout Itemize
803 \begin_layout Standard
804 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
805 few minor differences.
808 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
819 command lists the available templates.
820 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
821 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
822 and possibly propose text fragments
824 for the document, features
825 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
828 you would otherwise need to
829 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
831 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
835 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
839 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
847 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
853 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
854 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
858 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
899 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
900 to open a file or create a new one, that big
901 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
905 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
909 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
920 \begin_layout Standard
942 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
944 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
947 people work on the same document at the same time.
951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
952 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
955 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
960 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
961 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
963 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
965 \begin_inset Flex Emph
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
971 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
980 \begin_inset Flex Emph
983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
985 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
993 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_inset space ~
1013 will reload the document from disk.
1014 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1015 and want to restore it to the last save
1016 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1028 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1029 them as your changes.
1032 \begin_layout Section
1033 Basic Editing Features
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1046 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1053 \begin_layout Standard
1054 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1055 can perform cut and paste operations
1056 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1057 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1058 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1059 editing features and how to access
1061 We will start with cut and paste.
1064 \begin_layout Standard
1065 As you might expect, the
1069 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1070 various other editing features.
1071 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1075 \begin_layout Itemize
1081 \begin_inset Index idx
1084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1113 \begin_layout Itemize
1119 \begin_inset Index idx
1122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1151 \begin_layout Itemize
1157 \begin_inset Index idx
1160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1185 \begin_layout Itemize
1189 \begin_inset space ~
1195 \begin_layout Itemize
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1205 \begin_layout Itemize
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1219 \begin_inset Index idx
1222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1231 \begin_inset Index idx
1234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1249 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1259 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1265 \begin_layout Standard
1266 The first three are self-explanatory.
1267 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1268 and other programs using
1289 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1290 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1295 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1296 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1297 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1298 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1299 into individual cells.
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1308 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1309 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1313 \begin_layout Standard
1317 \begin_inset space ~
1322 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1324 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1326 \begin_inset space ~
1333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1339 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1340 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1341 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1347 \begin_inset space \space{}
1350 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1351 text which is often meaningless.)
1354 \begin_layout Standard
1358 \begin_inset space ~
1361 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1363 \begin_inset space ~
1367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1380 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1381 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1382 is inserted as one paragraph.
1383 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1387 \begin_inset space ~
1392 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1393 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1399 \begin_inset space ~
1402 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1416 \begin_inset space ~
1419 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1422 paste from the primary selection.
1423 This is normally the currently selected text.
1426 \begin_layout Standard
1429 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1431 \begin_inset space ~
1435 \begin_inset space ~
1443 \begin_inset space ~
1447 \begin_inset space ~
1453 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1459 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1471 \begin_inset space ~
1476 button to skip the curren
1477 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1481 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1488 \begin_inset space ~
1493 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1497 \begin_inset space ~
1502 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1504 If the toggle is set, searching for
1505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1516 will not match the word
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 Match whole words only
1533 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1534 to only find complete words, e.
1535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1539 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1568 also offers an advanced
1571 \begin_inset space ~
1575 \begin_inset space ~
1580 feature that is described in section
1581 \begin_inset space ~
1585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1587 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1594 \begin_layout Standard
1595 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1596 \begin_inset space \space{}
1600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1608 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1610 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1615 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1622 \begin_layout Standard
1626 arg "inset-select-all"
1629 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1630 When the cursor is inside an inset
1633 arg "inset-select-all"
1636 selects the content of the inset.
1640 arg "inset-select-all"
1643 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1644 then to the whole document.
1648 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1651 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1655 \begin_layout Section
1657 \begin_inset Index idx
1660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1667 \begin_inset Index idx
1670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1679 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1686 \begin_layout Standard
1687 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1689 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1695 or the toolbar button
1702 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 or the toolbar button
1714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1721 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1725 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1728 \begin_layout Standard
1729 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1738 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1739 This is a consequence of the 100
1740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1743 step undo limit mentioned above.
1746 \begin_layout Standard
1755 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1757 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1761 \begin_layout Section
1763 \begin_inset Index idx
1766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1775 \begin_layout Standard
1776 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1779 \begin_layout Enumerate
1784 \begin_layout Itemize
1789 once anywhere in the edit window.
1790 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1794 \begin_layout Enumerate
1799 \begin_layout Itemize
1806 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1809 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1812 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1813 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1815 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1816 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1822 \begin_layout Itemize
1823 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1826 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1833 \begin_layout Enumerate
1834 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1838 \begin_layout Standard
1839 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1840 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1844 \begin_layout Section
1846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1848 name "sec:Navigating"
1853 \begin_inset Index idx
1856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1865 \begin_layout Standard
1867 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1870 \begin_layout Itemize
1875 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1876 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1879 \begin_layout Itemize
1880 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1882 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1884 \begin_inset space ~
1889 or by the toolbar button
1892 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1898 \begin_layout Itemize
1899 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1901 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1904 and use the same menu to return to them.
1905 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1908 \begin_layout Standard
1912 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1917 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1918 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1920 \begin_inset space ~
1925 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1926 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1927 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1928 last editing position.
1931 \begin_layout Standard
1936 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1940 \begin_layout Subsection
1942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1944 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1949 \begin_inset Index idx
1952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1953 Navigating ! Outline
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1972 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1973 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1974 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1975 \begin_inset space ~
1979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1981 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1985 ), notes, or citations (see section
1986 \begin_inset space ~
1990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1992 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1997 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2001 \begin_layout Standard
2002 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2003 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2004 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2005 dialog and to modify the citation.
2008 \begin_layout Standard
2013 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2014 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2016 Labels and References
2018 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2027 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2032 control the display.
2037 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2038 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2043 option keeps it in the current view state.
2044 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2048 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2049 \begin_inset space ~
2052 3, the subsections of sections
2053 \begin_inset space ~
2056 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2061 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2066 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2076 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2079 \begin_layout Standard
2086 button refreshes the TOC (
2087 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2089 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2093 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2095 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2099 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2103 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2107 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2111 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2113 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2117 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2119 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2123 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2125 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2129 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2133 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2135 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2139 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2143 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2147 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2151 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2155 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2159 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2163 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2167 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2169 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2173 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2187 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2188 For example, you can move section
2189 \begin_inset space ~
2193 \begin_inset space ~
2196 2.4 or after section
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2215 (or the corresponding key bindings
2223 ) you can change the level of sections.
2224 You can make section
2225 \begin_inset space ~
2229 \begin_inset space ~
2233 \begin_inset space ~
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2240 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2241 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2244 \begin_layout Subsection
2245 Horizontal Scrolling
2246 \begin_inset Index idx
2249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2250 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2260 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2262 \begin_inset space ~
2265 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2266 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2267 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2271 \begin_layout Standard
2272 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2276 \begin_layout Itemize
2278 is used on a small tablet computer
2281 \begin_layout Itemize
2282 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2307 \begin_layout Itemize
2308 Math constructs with long command names
2311 \begin_layout Standard
2312 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2313 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2315 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2316 window so that table
2317 \begin_inset space ~
2321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2323 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2328 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2330 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2331 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2334 \begin_layout Standard
2335 \begin_inset Float table
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2348 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2352 Horizontal scrolling test.
2360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_inset Tabular
2363 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2364 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2365 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2366 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2367 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2409 \begin_layout Section
2410 Input/Word Completion
2411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2413 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2418 \begin_inset Index idx
2421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2428 \begin_inset Index idx
2431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2462 \begin_layout Standard
2464 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2466 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2467 is used to propose completions.
2470 \begin_layout Standard
2471 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2479 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset space ~
2495 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2499 \begin_inset space ~
2504 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2505 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2509 \begin_inset space ~
2515 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2516 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2517 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2518 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2521 \begin_layout Standard
2523 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2524 completions available.
2529 key to accept a proposed completion.
2530 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2531 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2532 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2535 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2542 \begin_layout Standard
2543 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2544 ing options for text.
2546 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2548 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2550 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2553 he special math option
2557 enables characters to be composed.
2559 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2561 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2565 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2568 you want to insert the character
2569 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2573 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2576 input the characters
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2591 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2595 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2597 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2602 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2604 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2607 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2610 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2612 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2615 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2620 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2622 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2626 's installation folder.
2628 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2629 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2636 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2641 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2642 In the example above,
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2679 \begin_layout Section
2681 \begin_inset Index idx
2684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2691 \begin_inset Index idx
2694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2723 \begin_inset Index idx
2726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2757 \begin_layout Standard
2758 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2772 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2775 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2779 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2780 \begin_inset space ~
2784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2786 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2797 \begin_inset space ~
2805 \begin_inset space ~
2826 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2830 \begin_layout Labeling
2831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2835 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2836 LatexCommand nomenclature
2838 description "Tabulator key"
2845 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2847 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2854 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2861 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2865 , especially section
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2872 reference "subsec:Lists"
2878 If you are still confused, look in the
2883 \begin_inset Newline newline
2891 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2892 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2896 \begin_layout Labeling
2897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2901 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2902 LatexCommand nomenclature
2904 description "Escape key"
2912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2919 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2920 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2923 \begin_layout Labeling
2924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2929 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2930 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2934 \begin_layout Standard
2935 There are three modifier keys:
2938 \begin_layout Labeling
2939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2957 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2958 LatexCommand nomenclature
2960 description "Control key"
2965 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2966 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2970 \begin_layout Itemize
2979 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2982 \begin_layout Itemize
2991 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2994 \begin_layout Itemize
3003 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3007 \begin_layout Labeling
3008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3026 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3027 LatexCommand nomenclature
3029 description "Shift key"
3034 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3035 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3038 \begin_layout Labeling
3039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3057 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3058 LatexCommand nomenclature
3060 description "Alt or Meta key"
3065 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3066 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3067 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3073 \begin_inset Newline newline
3076 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3078 menu accelerator keys
3081 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3082 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3086 \begin_layout Standard
3087 For example, the sequence
3088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3094 \begin_inset space ~
3098 \begin_inset space ~
3104 \begin_inset space ~
3112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3131 \begin_inset space ~
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 \begin_layout Standard
3152 manual lists all other things bound to the
3160 \begin_layout Standard
3161 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3163 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3165 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3166 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3168 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3169 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3170 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3172 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3188 followed by a capital
3195 \begin_layout Chapter
3198 \begin_inset Index idx
3201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3211 \begin_layout Section
3213 \begin_inset Index idx
3216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3225 \begin_layout Subsection
3229 \begin_layout Standard
3230 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3231 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3232 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3233 numbering schemes, and so on.
3234 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3235 and format the title of your document differently.
3238 \begin_layout Standard
3243 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3244 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3245 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3246 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3247 picks one for you by default.
3248 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3251 \begin_layout Subsection
3253 \begin_inset Index idx
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3265 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3272 \begin_layout Standard
3273 You can select a class using the
3275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3276 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3280 \begin_inset Index idx
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3290 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3298 \begin_layout Standard
3299 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3304 \begin_layout Description
3305 Article for basic articles
3308 \begin_layout Description
3309 Report for basic reports
3312 \begin_layout Description
3313 Book for writing a book
3316 \begin_layout Description
3317 Letter for US-style letters
3320 \begin_layout Standard
3321 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3322 only uses if you have installed
3323 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3324 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3325 distributions will include
3327 Here are some of the classes.
3328 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3330 Special Document Classes
3339 \begin_layout Description
3340 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3343 \begin_layout Description
3344 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3353 \begin_layout Description
3354 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3355 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3356 There are three article layouts available.
3357 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3358 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3359 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3360 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3365 sequential numbering
3366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3370 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3371 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3372 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3375 \begin_layout Description
3376 Beamer Layout for presentations
3379 \begin_layout Description
3380 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3381 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3382 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3383 with \SpecialChar LyX
3387 \begin_layout Description
3388 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3391 \begin_layout Description
3393 \begin_inset space ~
3396 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3399 \begin_layout Description
3400 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3403 \begin_layout Description
3404 Foils Used to make transparencies
3407 \begin_layout Description
3408 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3409 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3410 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3411 with \SpecialChar LyX
3415 \begin_layout Description
3416 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3417 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3420 \begin_layout Description
3421 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3424 \begin_layout Description
3425 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3428 \begin_layout Description
3429 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3430 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3431 (Is used by this document.)
3434 \begin_layout Description
3435 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3438 \begin_layout Description
3439 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3442 \begin_layout Description
3447 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3448 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3450 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3454 \begin_layout Description
3455 Slides Used to make transparencies
3458 \begin_layout Description
3460 \begin_inset space ~
3463 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3464 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3467 \begin_layout Description
3468 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3471 \begin_layout Standard
3472 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3474 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3476 Special Document Classes
3483 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3484 of the document classes.
3487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3491 \begin_layout Standard
3492 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3495 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3497 \begin_inset Index idx
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3517 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3518 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3520 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3523 \begin_layout Standard
3526 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3531 , are highly specialized.
3533 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3534 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3535 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3536 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3537 by some document class.
3538 There are just too many of them.
3539 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3543 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3551 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3552 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3553 document class for a new file.
3555 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3558 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3565 manual for information on how to install them.
3566 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3572 \begin_layout Standard
3573 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3574 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3575 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3576 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3577 class files to be used for dissertation
3578 s submitted to those universities.
3579 The \SpecialChar LyX
3580 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3582 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3586 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3592 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3599 name "subsec:Modules"
3604 \begin_inset Index idx
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 \begin_layout Standard
3617 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3618 chosen document class.
3619 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3620 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3631 \begin_inset Index idx
3634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3645 \begin_layout Standard
3646 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3647 packages or file format converters that are not always
3648 installed by default.
3650 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3651 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3652 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3653 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3655 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3656 file without the missing prerequisites.
3657 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3658 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3665 \begin_inset Index idx
3668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3669 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3676 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3680 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3684 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3693 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3695 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3706 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3709 \begin_layout Standard
3710 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3718 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3720 will advise you about these things.
3728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3732 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3737 \begin_inset Index idx
3740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3741 Document ! Local Layout
3749 \begin_layout Standard
3750 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3751 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3752 : They are intended to be used in
3753 a variety of different documents.
3754 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3755 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3756 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3757 need a specific inset or
3758 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3760 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3763 style only that one time.
3764 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3766 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3784 manual for information on how to use it.
3787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3791 \begin_layout Standard
3792 Each class has a default set of options.
3793 Here's a quick table describing them:
3796 \begin_layout Standard
3797 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3803 \begin_layout Standard
3805 \begin_inset Tabular
3806 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3807 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3812 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4273 \begin_layout Standard
4274 You're probably also wondering what
4275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4279 \begin_inset space ~
4283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4287 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4288 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4293 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4298 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4308 headings, there are also
4316 headings, and so on.
4317 We will describe these headings fully in section
4318 \begin_inset space ~
4322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4324 reference "subsec:Headings"
4331 \begin_layout Subsection
4333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4335 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 \begin_inset Index idx
4353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4372 \begin_inset space ~
4380 \begin_inset space ~
4385 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4387 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4388 doesn't support special options you want to
4389 use for your document.
4390 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4391 -class and its options, you have to read
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4397 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4401 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4405 \begin_inset space ~
4412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4418 \begin_inset space ~
4423 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4424 You can choose between the following five options:
4427 \begin_layout Labeling
4428 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4433 Use default page style of current class.
4436 \begin_layout Labeling
4437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4442 No page numbers or headings.
4445 \begin_layout Labeling
4446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4454 \begin_layout Labeling
4455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4460 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4461 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4462 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4463 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4466 \begin_layout Labeling
4467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4472 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4473 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4490 How they are defined is explained in section
4491 \begin_inset space ~
4495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4497 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4506 \begin_inset space ~
4510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4512 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4519 \begin_layout Subsection
4520 Paper Size and Orientation
4521 \begin_inset Index idx
4524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4525 Document ! Paper size
4531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4533 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4540 \begin_layout Standard
4541 You can find the following options in the menu
4544 \begin_inset space ~
4551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4555 \begin_inset Index idx
4558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 \begin_layout Labeling
4568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4572 \begin_inset space ~
4577 What size paper to print on.
4582 \begin_layout Itemize
4588 \begin_layout Itemize
4594 \begin_layout Itemize
4600 \begin_layout Itemize
4606 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 US letter, US legal, US executive
4612 \begin_layout Itemize
4618 \begin_layout Itemize
4625 \begin_layout Labeling
4626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4631 To choose whether to output as
4642 \begin_layout Labeling
4643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4647 \begin_inset space ~
4652 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4653 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4656 \begin_layout Subsection
4658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4660 name "subsec:Margins"
4665 \begin_inset Index idx
4668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4675 \begin_inset Index idx
4678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 Paper margins are set in the menu
4690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4694 \begin_inset Index idx
4697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4706 \begin_layout Standard
4707 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4708 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4709 the paper format and the font size into account.
4712 \begin_layout Subsection
4716 \begin_layout Standard
4717 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4718 has to convert everything into the new
4720 That includes the paragraph environments.
4721 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4722 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4723 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4725 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4734 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4736 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4737 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4738 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4741 \begin_layout Section
4742 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4743 \begin_inset Index idx
4746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4747 Paragraph ! Indentation
4755 \begin_layout Subsection
4757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4759 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4766 \begin_layout Standard
4767 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4768 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4771 \begin_layout Standard
4772 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4773 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4774 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4775 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4779 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4785 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4786 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4787 language than English.
4789 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4792 \begin_layout Standard
4793 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4794 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4795 into \SpecialChar LyX
4797 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4800 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4802 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4803 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4804 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4811 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4812 goes to produce a printable file.
4817 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4819 gives you the ability globally to change
4823 these pre-coded spacings.
4824 We will explain more later.
4827 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 Paragraph Separation
4829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4831 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 Paragraph ! Separation
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4856 \begin_inset space ~
4864 \begin_inset space ~
4871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4875 \begin_inset Index idx
4878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4884 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4887 \begin_layout Subsection
4891 \begin_layout Standard
4892 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4897 \begin_inset space ~
4902 dialog and toggle the
4905 \begin_inset space ~
4910 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4913 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4917 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4918 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4922 \begin_layout Standard
4923 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4924 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4927 \begin_layout Subsection
4929 \begin_inset Index idx
4932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4933 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4941 \begin_layout Standard
4944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4948 \begin_inset Index idx
4951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4960 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4964 \begin_inset space ~
4973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4974 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4980 \begin_inset Index idx
4983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4990 installed to use this feature.
4995 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4997 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4999 \begin_inset space ~
5004 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5005 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5008 \begin_layout Section
5009 Paragraph Environments
5010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5012 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5017 \begin_inset Index idx
5020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5021 Paragraph ! Environments
5027 \begin_inset Index idx
5030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5031 Paragraph environments|(
5039 \begin_layout Subsection
5043 \begin_layout Standard
5044 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5056 } \SpecialChar ldots
5066 \begin_inset Newline newline
5069 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5071 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5072 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5073 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5082 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5085 \begin_layout Standard
5086 A paragraph environment is simply a
5087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5094 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5095 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5096 scheme, labels, and so on.
5097 Additionally, you can
5098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5105 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5106 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5107 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5108 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5110 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5112 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5116 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5117 \begin_inset Graphics
5118 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5124 at the left end of the toolbar.
5126 will change the environment of the
5130 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5131 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5132 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5135 \begin_layout Standard
5144 create a new paragraph using the
5148 paragraph environment.
5150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5157 because if you are in one of these environments:
5160 \begin_layout Itemize
5166 \begin_layout Itemize
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5178 \begin_layout Itemize
5184 \begin_layout Itemize
5190 \begin_layout Itemize
5196 \begin_layout Itemize
5202 \begin_layout Standard
5204 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5208 , rather than resetting it to
5213 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5214 \begin_inset space ~
5218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5220 reference "sec:Nesting"
5227 \begin_layout Subsection
5231 \begin_layout Standard
5232 The default paragraph environment is
5237 It creates a plain paragraph.
5239 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5240 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5241 this manual) are in the
5248 \begin_layout Standard
5249 You can nest a paragraph using the
5253 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5261 \begin_layout Subsection
5263 \begin_inset Index idx
5266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5275 \begin_layout Standard
5276 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5277 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5286 for thanks or contact information.
5287 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5288 places all of this on a separate page
5289 along with today's date.
5290 For other types of documents, the title
5291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5298 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5301 \begin_layout Standard
5303 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5317 Here's how you use them:
5320 \begin_layout Itemize
5321 Put the title of your document in the
5328 \begin_layout Itemize
5329 Put the author name in the
5336 \begin_layout Itemize
5337 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5338 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5344 Note that using this environment is optional.
5345 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5346 will automatically insert today's date.
5347 If you don't want a date, use the option
5349 Suppress default date on front page
5353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5364 \begin_layout Standard
5365 You can use footnotes to insert
5366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 or contact information.
5376 \begin_layout Subsection
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5390 name "subsec:Headings"
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5398 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5400 takes care of the numbering for you.
5403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5405 \begin_inset Index idx
5408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5409 Section headings ! Numbered
5417 \begin_layout Standard
5418 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5422 \begin_layout Enumerate
5428 \begin_layout Enumerate
5434 \begin_layout Enumerate
5440 \begin_layout Enumerate
5446 \begin_layout Enumerate
5452 \begin_layout Enumerate
5458 \begin_layout Enumerate
5464 \begin_layout Standard
5466 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5467 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5468 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5469 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5471 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5473 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5481 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5482 You group the book into chapters.
5484 does a similar grouping:
5487 \begin_layout Itemize
5492 is divided into either
5503 \begin_layout Itemize
5515 \begin_layout Itemize
5527 \begin_layout Itemize
5539 \begin_layout Itemize
5551 \begin_layout Itemize
5563 \begin_layout Standard
5564 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 Not all document types use the
5576 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5581 is the top-level heading.
5589 \begin_layout Standard
5594 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5595 labels it with its number,
5596 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5598 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5612 \begin_inset Index idx
5615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5625 The unnumbered section headings have a
5626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5633 at the end of their name.
5634 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5635 the table of contents, see section
5636 \begin_inset space ~
5640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5649 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5650 Changing the Numbering
5651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5653 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5660 \begin_layout Standard
5661 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5662 in the Table of Contents.
5663 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5665 Just as certain classes start with
5679 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5689 This is something you can change.
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5699 \begin_inset Index idx
5702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5711 \begin_inset space ~
5715 \begin_inset space ~
5720 you will see two counters.
5725 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5726 numbers a section heading.
5727 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5732 Short Titles of Headings
5733 \begin_inset Index idx
5736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5737 Section headings ! Short titles
5743 \begin_inset Argument 1
5746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5755 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5762 \begin_layout Standard
5763 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5764 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5765 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5766 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5769 \begin_layout Standard
5771 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5772 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5773 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5774 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5779 \begin_inset space ~
5785 This will insert a box labeled
5786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5797 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5798 This also works for captions inside floats.
5799 There can only be one short title per title.
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5803 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5810 \begin_layout Standard
5811 The following information applies to all section headings:
5814 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5822 \begin_layout Itemize
5823 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5830 \begin_layout Subsection
5834 \begin_layout Standard
5836 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5850 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5851 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5852 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5853 the text they contain.
5854 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5862 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5865 \begin_layout Standard
5866 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5875 when you start a new paragraph.
5876 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5880 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5881 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5882 have to change back to the
5886 environment yourself.
5889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5898 \begin_inset Index idx
5901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5912 time for the differences.
5921 are identical except for one difference:
5925 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5934 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5937 \begin_layout Standard
5938 Here's an example of the
5951 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5953 See – no indentation!
5957 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5958 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5959 the other paragraph.
5962 \begin_layout Standard
5963 Here's another example, this time in the
5970 \begin_layout Quotation
5976 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5977 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5978 the first line, then
5982 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5986 you were quoting other text.
5989 \begin_layout Quotation
5990 Here's a new paragraph.
5991 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5992 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5995 \begin_layout Standard
5996 As the examples show,
6000 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6001 They should put quotes in the
6006 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6010 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6013 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6015 \begin_inset Index idx
6018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6025 \begin_inset Index idx
6028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6044 \begin_layout Standard
6049 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6055 \begin_inset Newline newline
6058 Which I did not rehearse!
6062 It could be much worse.
6063 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6065 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6066 indented a bit more than the first.
6067 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6073 \begin_inset Newline newline
6076 And make things look fine
6077 \begin_inset Newline newline
6083 arg "newline-insert newline"
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6094 does not indent both margins.
6095 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6096 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6099 arg "newline-insert newline"
6105 \begin_layout Subsection
6107 \begin_inset Index idx
6110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6126 \begin_layout Standard
6128 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6138 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6139 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6148 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6149 lets you provide your own label.
6150 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6151 describing some general features of all four of them.
6154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6158 \begin_layout Standard
6159 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6161 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6162 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6171 reset the environment to
6175 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6176 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6177 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6181 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6185 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6193 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6194 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6195 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6197 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6198 you read all of section
6199 \begin_inset space ~
6203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6205 reference "sec:Nesting"
6212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6214 \begin_inset Index idx
6217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6234 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6238 paragraph environment.
6239 It has the following properties:
6242 \begin_layout Itemize
6243 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6247 \begin_layout Itemize
6249 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6252 \begin_layout Itemize
6253 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6257 \begin_layout Itemize
6258 The items can have any length.
6260 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6261 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6268 \begin_layout Itemize
6273 environment inside another
6277 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6281 \begin_layout Itemize
6282 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6285 \begin_layout Itemize
6287 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6290 \begin_layout Itemize
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6298 reference "sec:Nesting"
6302 for a full explanation of nesting.
6306 \begin_layout Standard
6307 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6316 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6319 \begin_layout Standard
6320 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6321 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6324 \begin_layout Itemize
6325 The label for the first level
6329 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6333 \begin_layout Itemize
6334 The label for the second level is a dash.
6338 \begin_layout Itemize
6339 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6343 \begin_layout Itemize
6344 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6348 \begin_layout Itemize
6349 Back out to the third level.
6353 \begin_layout Itemize
6354 Back to the second level.
6358 \begin_layout Itemize
6359 Back to the outermost level.
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6363 These are the default labels for an
6368 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6370 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6373 dialog in the submenu
6378 \begin_inset Index idx
6381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6387 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_layout Standard
6392 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6393 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6395 \begin_inset space ~
6399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6401 reference "sec:Nesting"
6408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6410 \begin_inset Index idx
6413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6422 name "sec:Enumerate"
6429 \begin_layout Standard
6434 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6435 It has these properties:
6438 \begin_layout Enumerate
6439 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6443 \begin_layout Enumerate
6444 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6448 \begin_layout Enumerate
6450 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6453 \begin_layout Enumerate
6458 environment resets the counter to one.
6461 \begin_layout Enumerate
6474 \begin_layout Enumerate
6475 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6476 Items can have any length.
6479 \begin_layout Enumerate
6480 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6487 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6492 \begin_layout Standard
6501 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6503 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6504 labels the four different levels in an
6511 \begin_layout Enumerate
6512 The first level of an
6516 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6520 \begin_layout Enumerate
6521 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6525 \begin_layout Enumerate
6526 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6530 \begin_layout Enumerate
6531 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6534 \begin_layout Enumerate
6535 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6540 \begin_layout Enumerate
6541 Back to the third level
6545 \begin_layout Enumerate
6546 Back to the second level.
6550 \begin_layout Enumerate
6551 Back to the outermost level.
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6555 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6559 environment, see section
6560 \begin_inset space ~
6564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6566 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6571 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6575 \begin_layout Standard
6576 There is more to nesting
6580 environments than we've stated here.
6581 You should read section
6582 \begin_inset space ~
6586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6588 reference "sec:Nesting"
6592 to learn more about nesting.
6595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6597 \begin_inset Index idx
6600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6609 \begin_layout Standard
6610 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6614 list has no fixed label.
6615 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6624 of the first line as the label.
6628 \begin_layout Description
6629 Example: This is an example of the
6636 \begin_layout Standard
6638 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6642 \begin_layout Standard
6644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6651 it is meant that the first usage of the
6655 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6657 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6665 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6671 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6673 \begin_inset space ~
6679 \begin_inset space ~
6683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6685 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6689 for more information.) Here is an example:
6692 \begin_layout Description
6694 \begin_inset space ~
6697 Example: This one shows how to use a
6700 \begin_inset space ~
6712 \begin_layout Description
6713 Usage: You should use the
6717 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6718 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6720 It's not a good idea to use a
6724 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6725 You're better off using
6737 paragraphs into them.
6740 \begin_layout Description
6741 Nesting: You can nest
6745 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6749 \begin_layout Standard
6750 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6751 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6752 them from the first line.
6755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6757 \begin_inset Index idx
6760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6769 \begin_layout Standard
6774 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6775 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6779 \begin_layout Standard
6788 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6790 Here are its properties:
6793 \begin_layout Labeling
6794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6796 \begin_inset space ~
6799 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6808 of each line as the item label.
6813 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6814 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6815 space as described above.
6818 \begin_layout Labeling
6819 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6820 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6821 uses different margins for the item label and the
6822 body of the item text.
6823 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6824 label width plus a little extra space.
6827 \begin_layout Labeling
6828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6830 \begin_inset space ~
6833 width \SpecialChar LyX
6834 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6835 If the label width is larger, the label
6836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6843 into the first line.
6844 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6845 margin of the rest of the item text.
6848 \begin_layout Labeling
6849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6851 \begin_inset space ~
6854 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6859 environment has the same left margin.
6860 \begin_inset Newline newline
6863 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6868 \begin_inset space ~
6873 dialog (toolbar button
6876 arg "layout-paragraph"
6883 \begin_inset space ~
6888 determines the default label width.
6889 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6898 multiple times instead.
6899 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6909 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6912 \begin_inset space ~
6917 every time you alter a label in a
6922 \begin_inset Newline newline
6925 The predefined default width is the length of
6926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6934 \begin_inset space ~
6940 \begin_layout Standard
6945 list the same way as the
6949 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6955 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6964 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6965 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6967 \begin_inset space ~
6971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6973 reference "sec:Nesting"
6977 to learn about nesting.
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6981 There is yet another feature of the
6985 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6986 left-justifies the item labels by
6988 You can use additional
6992 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6993 justifies the item label.
6998 are documented in section
6999 \begin_inset space ~
7003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7005 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7010 Here are some examples:
7013 \begin_layout Labeling
7014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7015 Left The default for
7022 \begin_layout Labeling
7023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7024 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7031 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7034 \begin_layout Labeling
7035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7036 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7040 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7047 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7050 \begin_layout Subsection
7052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7054 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7059 \begin_inset Index idx
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7072 The features described in this section require that the module
7074 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7076 is loaded in the document settings.
7077 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7083 \begin_inset Index idx
7086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7097 Custom Enumerate Lists
7098 \begin_inset Index idx
7101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7102 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7112 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7118 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7119 There you add the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7143 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7144 Code, look at section
7145 \begin_inset space ~
7149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7151 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7164 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7171 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7172 For capital Roman numerals replace
7184 in the command above.
7185 For Arabic numerals use
7193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7200 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 You can only number 26
7226 \begin_inset space ~
7229 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7237 \begin_layout Standard
7238 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7239 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7242 \begin_layout Standard
7243 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7246 \begin_layout Enumerate
7247 \begin_inset Argument 1
7250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7276 \begin_layout Enumerate
7277 \begin_inset Argument 1
7280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Enumerate
7308 \begin_layout Enumerate
7309 \begin_inset Argument 1
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7336 \begin_layout Enumerate
7337 \begin_inset Argument 1
7340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7366 \begin_layout Standard
7367 For this list these commands were used:
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_inset Newline newline
7389 \begin_inset Newline newline
7397 \begin_inset Newline newline
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7414 makes the label emphasized and
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7432 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7433 lists until you change the definition.
7441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7443 \begin_inset Index idx
7446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7455 \begin_layout Standard
7456 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7459 \begin_layout Enumerate
7460 \begin_inset Argument 1
7463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7482 \begin_inset Note Note
7485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7486 goes back to default numbering
7494 \begin_layout Enumerate
7498 \begin_layout Standard
7502 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7506 \begin_layout Standard
7507 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7512 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7513 to indicate that it is a resumed
7514 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7515 , but in the output.
7518 \begin_layout Standard
7519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7527 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7536 \begin_layout Standard
7537 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7539 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7540 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7541 of a normal enumeration.
7542 There, insert the command
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7551 \begin_layout Standard
7556 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7560 \begin_layout Enumerate
7564 \begin_layout Enumerate
7568 \begin_layout Standard
7569 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7572 \begin_layout Enumerate
7573 \begin_inset Argument 1
7576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7592 This enumeration starts at 4
7595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7597 \begin_inset Index idx
7600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7609 \begin_layout Standard
7610 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7612 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7615 \begin_layout Itemize
7619 \begin_layout Itemize
7620 with standard spacing
7623 \begin_layout Standard
7624 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7626 Add there the command
7630 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7633 \begin_layout Itemize
7634 \begin_inset Argument 1
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7656 \begin_layout Itemize
7660 \begin_layout Itemize
7664 \begin_layout Standard
7665 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7672 \begin_inset Index idx
7675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7683 For more information see its documentation,
7684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7694 \begin_layout Standard
7695 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7697 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7698 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7702 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7705 \begin_layout Enumerate
7706 \begin_inset Argument 1
7709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7717 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7730 \begin_layout Enumerate
7731 with negative indentation
7734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7735 Further Customization
7736 \begin_inset Index idx
7739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7740 Lists ! Customization
7748 \begin_layout Standard
7749 You can also change the style of description lists.
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7759 \begin_layout Standard
7760 changes the description label font, the command
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7769 \begin_layout Standard
7770 sets the list style.
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 An example where the command
7777 \begin_layout Standard
7782 itshape, style=nextline
7785 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_layout Description
7791 \begin_inset space ~
7795 \begin_inset Argument 1
7798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7806 itshape, style=nextline
7816 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7817 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7821 \begin_layout Description
7823 \begin_inset space ~
7826 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7827 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7828 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7838 \begin_inset Index idx
7841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7849 For more information see its documentation
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7860 \begin_layout Subsection
7862 \begin_inset Index idx
7865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7876 \begin_inset space ~
7879 Address: An Overview
7882 \begin_layout Standard
7883 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7884 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7892 \begin_inset space ~
7898 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7899 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7900 gags on the document.
7901 In contrast, you can use the
7908 \begin_inset space ~
7913 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7914 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7918 \begin_layout Standard
7919 Of course, you're not limited to using
7926 \begin_inset space ~
7935 \begin_inset space ~
7940 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7941 some European academic papers.
7944 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7948 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7955 \begin_layout Standard
7960 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7961 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7965 \begin_inset space ~
7970 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7971 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7972 Here's an example of each:
7975 \begin_layout Right Address
7977 \begin_inset Newline newline
7981 \begin_inset Newline newline
7985 \begin_inset Newline newline
7988 When is it? What is today?
7991 \begin_layout Standard
7995 \begin_inset space ~
8001 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8003 the largest block of text on a single line.
8004 Here's an example of the
8011 \begin_layout Address
8013 \begin_inset Newline newline
8016 Where do I send this
8017 \begin_inset Newline newline
8020 Your post office and country
8023 \begin_layout Standard
8024 As you can see, both
8031 \begin_inset space ~
8036 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8041 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8042 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8048 This makes sense, since
8056 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8057 Thus, you have to use
8064 arg "newline-insert newline"
8069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8070 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8072 \begin_inset space ~
8076 \begin_inset space ~
8081 ) to start a new line in an
8088 \begin_inset space ~
8096 \begin_layout Subsection
8100 \begin_layout Standard
8101 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8102 or list of references.
8104 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8109 \begin_inset Index idx
8112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8121 \begin_layout Standard
8126 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8127 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8128 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8129 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8133 in anything else or vice versa.
8139 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8140 The book document classes ignores the
8144 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8148 in a letter document class.
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8156 environment does several things for you.
8157 First, it puts the centered label
8158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8166 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8168 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8169 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8170 the subsequent text.
8171 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8173 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8178 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8182 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8183 The new paragraph will still be in the
8188 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8189 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8193 \begin_inset Float figure
8200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8202 \begin_inset Graphics
8203 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8216 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8237 \begin_layout Standard
8238 We would love to demonstrate the
8242 environment, but since this document is in the
8243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8250 class, we can't do this.
8251 We inserted it therefore as figure
8252 \begin_inset space ~
8256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8258 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8263 If you have never heard of an
8264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8271 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8276 \begin_inset Index idx
8279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8288 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8295 \begin_layout Standard
8300 environment is used to list references.
8301 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8302 only use it at the end of the document.
8314 \begin_layout Standard
8315 When you first open a
8319 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8320 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8336 depending on the document class.
8337 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8338 Each paragraph of the
8342 environment is a bibliography entry.
8347 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8348 Each new paragraph is still in the
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8357 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8359 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8361 handling, have a look at section
8362 \begin_inset space ~
8366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8368 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8375 \begin_layout Subsection
8376 Special Environments
8379 \begin_layout Standard
8381 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8382 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8403 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8410 \begin_layout Standard
8416 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8418 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8423 key as a fixed whitespace.
8427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8440 \begin_inset space ~
8445 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8463 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8466 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8469 arg "newline-insert newline"
8486 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8487 So, when you finish using the
8492 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8493 Also, you can nest the
8498 environment inside of others.
8501 \begin_layout Standard
8502 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 arg "newline-insert newline"
8512 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8517 \begin_inset space \space{}
8527 arg "newline-insert newline"
8533 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 arg "newline-insert newline"
8547 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8555 You must put at least one
8559 in any line you want blank.
8560 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8569 since that will insert
8574 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8577 arg "self-insert \""
8583 \begin_layout Standard
8587 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8591 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8595 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8599 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8603 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8604 printf("Hello World!
8609 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8613 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8617 \begin_layout Standard
8618 This is just the standard
8619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8629 \begin_layout Standard
8635 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8637 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8638 as if you used a typewriter.
8639 \begin_inset Index idx
8642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8643 Paragraph environments|)
8648 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8651 Program Code Listings
8656 \begin_inset space ~
8664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8668 \begin_inset Index idx
8671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8680 \begin_layout Standard
8685 environment is similar to the
8690 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8691 computer console text.
8696 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8710 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8711 you can have empty lines.
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 have a certain language and a text style
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8730 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8731 and \SpecialChar TeX
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8736 Because of these properties
8740 works like a typewriter.
8744 \begin_layout Verbatim
8748 \begin_layout Verbatim
8751 The following 2 lines are empty:
8754 \begin_layout Verbatim
8758 \begin_layout Verbatim
8762 \begin_layout Verbatim
8763 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8768 \begin_layout Standard
8773 environment is identical to
8777 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8778 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8785 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8789 \begin_layout Section
8790 Nesting Environments
8791 \begin_inset Index idx
8794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8795 Nesting ! Environments
8801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8810 \begin_layout Subsection
8814 \begin_layout Standard
8816 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8818 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8820 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8822 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8834 \begin_layout Enumerate
8838 \begin_layout Enumerate
8843 \begin_layout Enumerate
8847 \begin_layout Enumerate
8852 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8857 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8858 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8860 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8862 \begin_inset space ~
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8874 \begin_inset space ~
8878 \begin_inset space ~
8883 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8885 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8888 arg "depth-increment"
8894 arg "depth-decrement"
8908 arg "depth-increment"
8914 arg "depth-decrement"
8918 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8919 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8923 \begin_layout Standard
8924 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8925 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8926 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8927 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8928 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8932 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8934 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8936 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8939 \begin_layout Subsection
8940 What You Can and Can't Nest
8943 \begin_layout Standard
8944 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8945 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8948 \begin_layout Standard
8949 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8950 than a simple yes or no.
8951 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8954 \begin_layout Itemize
8955 Completely unnestable
8958 \begin_layout Itemize
8959 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8963 \begin_layout Itemize
8964 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8968 \begin_layout Standard
8969 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8970 environments have them:
8973 \begin_layout Description
8974 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8975 Can't nest into them.
8979 \begin_layout Itemize
8985 \begin_layout Itemize
8991 \begin_layout Itemize
8997 \begin_layout Itemize
9003 \begin_layout Itemize
9010 \begin_layout Description
9012 \begin_inset space ~
9015 Nestable You can nest them.
9016 You can nest other things into them.
9020 \begin_layout Itemize
9026 \begin_layout Itemize
9032 \begin_layout Itemize
9038 \begin_layout Itemize
9044 \begin_layout Itemize
9050 \begin_layout Itemize
9056 \begin_layout Itemize
9062 \begin_layout Itemize
9069 \begin_layout Itemize
9075 \begin_layout Itemize
9082 \begin_layout Description
9083 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9084 You can't nest anything into them.
9088 \begin_layout Itemize
9094 \begin_layout Itemize
9100 \begin_layout Itemize
9106 \begin_layout Itemize
9112 \begin_layout Itemize
9118 \begin_layout Itemize
9124 \begin_layout Itemize
9130 \begin_layout Itemize
9136 \begin_layout Itemize
9142 \begin_layout Itemize
9148 \begin_layout Itemize
9154 \begin_layout Itemize
9160 \begin_layout Itemize
9166 \begin_layout Itemize
9170 \begin_inset space ~
9176 \begin_layout Itemize
9183 \begin_layout Standard
9184 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9192 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9202 \begin_inset space ~
9205 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9206 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9207 nested section headings violate this.
9215 \begin_layout Subsection
9216 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9217 \begin_inset Index idx
9220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9221 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9229 \begin_layout Standard
9230 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9231 affected by nesting anyhow.
9235 \begin_layout Itemize
9239 \begin_layout Itemize
9243 \begin_layout Itemize
9247 \begin_layout Standard
9249 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9257 Figures and tables in
9261 are not affected by this.
9266 Have a look at section
9267 \begin_inset space ~
9271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9273 reference "sec:Floats"
9277 for more information about
9284 \begin_layout Standard
9286 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9287 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9292 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9300 of its own, it behaves just like a
9301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9308 paragraph environment.
9309 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9313 \begin_layout Standard
9314 Here's an example with a table:
9317 \begin_layout Enumerate
9322 \begin_layout Enumerate
9323 This is (a) and it's nested.
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9334 \begin_layout Standard
9336 \begin_inset Tabular
9337 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9338 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9339 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9340 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9424 \begin_layout Standard
9425 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9432 \begin_layout Enumerate
9434 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9438 \begin_layout Enumerate
9442 \begin_layout Standard
9443 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9446 \begin_layout Enumerate
9451 \begin_layout Enumerate
9452 This is (a) and it's nested.
9456 \begin_layout Standard
9457 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9463 \begin_layout Standard
9465 \begin_inset Tabular
9466 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9467 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9468 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9469 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9553 \begin_layout Standard
9554 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9560 \begin_layout Enumerate
9567 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9570 \begin_layout Enumerate
9574 \begin_layout Standard
9575 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9579 \begin_layout Standard
9580 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9583 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9586 \begin_layout Enumerate
9591 \begin_layout Enumerate
9592 This is (a) and it's nested.
9595 \begin_layout Standard
9596 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9602 \begin_layout Standard
9604 \begin_inset Tabular
9605 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9606 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9607 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9608 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9693 \begin_layout Standard
9694 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9700 \begin_layout Enumerate
9702 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9709 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 \begin_layout Standard
9714 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9720 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9721 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9725 \begin_layout Subsection
9726 Usage and General Features
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9730 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9731 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9740 is the innermost possible depth.
9741 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9744 \begin_layout Enumerate
9745 level #1 – outermost
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9754 \begin_layout Enumerate
9759 \begin_layout Enumerate
9764 \begin_layout Itemize
9769 \begin_layout Itemize
9778 \begin_layout Standard
9779 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9780 both of them in the example.
9781 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9791 For example, if we tried to nest another
9796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9803 , we would get errors.
9806 \begin_layout Subsection
9808 \begin_inset Index idx
9811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9820 \begin_layout Standard
9821 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9822 We have several examples of nested environments.
9823 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9828 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9831 \begin_layout Labeling
9832 \labelwidthstring MMM
9833 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9842 \begin_layout Labeling
9843 \labelwidthstring MMM
9844 #2-a This is level #2.
9845 We created it by using
9848 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9854 arg "depth-increment"
9861 \begin_layout Labeling
9862 \labelwidthstring MMM
9863 #3-a This is level #3.
9864 This time, we just enter
9871 arg "depth-increment"
9875 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9879 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9885 arg "depth-increment"
9892 \begin_layout Standard
9897 environment, nested inside of
9898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9906 So, it's at level #4.
9907 We did this by entering
9910 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9916 arg "depth-increment"
9919 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9924 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9940 \begin_layout Standard
9945 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9948 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9954 \begin_layout Labeling
9955 \labelwidthstring MMM
9956 #4-a This is level #4.
9960 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9963 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9968 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9972 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9977 keep nesting things inside
9978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9989 \begin_layout Labeling
9990 \labelwidthstring MMM
9991 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9996 \begin_layout Labeling
9997 \labelwidthstring MMM
9998 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9999 and this is level #6.
10000 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10004 \begin_layout Labeling
10005 \labelwidthstring MMM
10006 #5-b Back to level #5.
10010 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10016 arg "depth-decrement"
10023 \begin_layout Labeling
10024 \labelwidthstring MMM
10028 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10034 arg "depth-decrement"
10037 , we're back at level #4.
10041 \begin_layout Labeling
10042 \labelwidthstring MMM
10043 #3-b Back to level #3.
10044 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10048 \begin_layout Labeling
10049 \labelwidthstring MMM
10050 #2-b Back to level #2.
10054 \begin_layout Labeling
10055 \labelwidthstring MMM
10056 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10057 After this sentence, we will enter
10061 and change the paragraph environment back to
10068 \begin_layout Standard
10069 We could have also used the
10085 environment in place of the
10090 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10094 Example 2: Inheritance
10097 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10098 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10101 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10110 arg "depth-increment"
10114 \begin_inset Newline newline
10117 which, we will change to the
10125 \begin_layout Enumerate
10130 environment, at level #2.
10133 \begin_layout Enumerate
10134 Notice how the nested
10138 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10142 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10146 \begin_layout Standard
10147 We ended this example by entering
10152 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10156 and reset the nesting depth by using
10159 arg "depth-decrement"
10165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10166 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10175 \begin_inset Argument 1
10178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10179 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10187 \begin_layout Enumerate
10188 This is level #1, in an
10192 paragraph environment.
10193 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10197 \begin_layout Enumerate
10202 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10208 arg "depth-increment"
10212 Now, what happens if we nest an
10216 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10217 label be? An asterisk?
10221 \begin_layout Itemize
10231 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10232 So, its label is a bullet.
10233 (We got here by using
10236 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10242 arg "depth-increment"
10245 , then changing the environment to
10253 \begin_layout Itemize
10254 Here's level #4, produced using
10257 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10263 arg "depth-increment"
10267 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10272 \begin_layout Enumerate
10274 to get to level #5.
10275 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10280 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10284 , because we are in the
10292 environment (that is, it is an
10307 \begin_layout Enumerate
10312 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10313 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10317 \begin_layout Enumerate
10318 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10321 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10324 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10327 \begin_layout Enumerate
10331 arg "depth-decrement"
10334 to decrease the depth after the next
10337 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10344 \begin_layout Enumerate
10346 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10351 \begin_layout Enumerate
10353 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10354 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10358 \begin_layout Enumerate
10359 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10368 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10373 reset the counter for the label.
10377 \begin_layout Enumerate
10381 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10387 arg "depth-decrement"
10390 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10391 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10392 into the twofold-nested
10400 \begin_layout Enumerate
10401 The same thing happens if we do another
10404 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10410 arg "depth-decrement"
10413 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10416 \begin_layout Standard
10417 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10422 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10433 The number of other
10437 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10444 The same rule applies for the
10448 environment, as well.
10451 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10452 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10455 \begin_layout Enumerate
10456 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10457 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10458 the same detail with how we did it.
10467 \begin_layout Standard
10475 arg "depth-increment"
10482 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10483 the example in parentheses someplace.
10484 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10485 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10486 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10499 \begin_layout Verse
10500 Now we will add verse.
10501 \begin_inset Newline newline
10504 It will get much worse.
10505 \begin_inset Newline newline
10515 arg "depth-increment"
10525 \begin_layout Verse
10526 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10527 \begin_inset Newline newline
10530 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10531 \begin_inset Newline newline
10537 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10545 \begin_layout Verse
10546 Here comes a table:
10550 \begin_layout Standard
10551 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10557 \begin_layout Standard
10559 \begin_inset Tabular
10560 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10561 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10648 \begin_layout Verse
10652 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10662 arg "depth-increment"
10668 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10674 \begin_inset Newline newline
10682 arg "depth-decrement"
10689 \begin_layout Enumerate
10694 : level #1) This is another item.
10695 Note that selecting a
10699 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10700 3 times to put the table inside the
10707 \begin_layout Quotation
10708 We're now ending the
10712 list and changing to
10717 We're still at level #1.
10718 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10719 The next set of paragraphs is a
10720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10727 We will nest both the
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10739 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10743 for the letter body.
10747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10750 to preserve the depth.
10751 Remember that you need to use
10754 arg "newline-insert newline"
10757 to create multiple lines inside the
10764 \begin_inset space ~
10774 \begin_layout Right Address
10776 \begin_inset Newline newline
10779 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10780 \begin_inset Newline newline
10786 \begin_layout Address
10788 \begin_inset space ~
10794 \begin_layout Quotation
10795 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10799 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10800 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10801 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10802 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10803 as soon as possible.
10804 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10807 \begin_layout Quotation
10808 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10809 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10810 with your order, along with payment.
10813 \begin_layout Quotation
10814 We thank you again for your patience.
10817 \begin_layout Address
10819 \begin_inset Newline newline
10826 \begin_layout Quotation
10827 That ends that example!
10830 \begin_layout Standard
10831 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10832 gives you a lot of power with just
10834 We could have easily nested an
10855 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10858 \begin_layout Subsection
10860 \begin_inset Index idx
10863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10864 Nesting ! Separation
10870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10872 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10879 \begin_layout Standard
10880 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10882 For example you need two different enumerations:
10885 \begin_layout Enumerate
10890 \begin_layout Enumerate
10895 \begin_layout Enumerate
10899 \begin_layout Standard
10900 \begin_inset Separator plain
10906 \begin_layout Itemize
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10913 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10919 \begin_layout Enumerate
10923 \begin_layout Enumerate
10927 \begin_layout Enumerate
10931 \begin_layout Standard
10932 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10933 list item and use the menu
10935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10936 Separated <Name> Above
10940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10941 Separated <Name> Below
10944 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10945 ) and before or behind it the
10947 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10950 \begin_layout Standard
10951 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10952 (red arrow in LyX).
10953 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10954 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10957 \begin_layout Standard
10958 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10961 arg "paragraph-break"
10968 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10971 \begin_layout Section
10972 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10973 \begin_inset Index idx
10976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10985 \begin_layout Standard
10986 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10987 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10989 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10990 be broken at the end of a line.
10991 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10995 \begin_layout Subsection
10997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10999 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11004 \begin_inset Index idx
11007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11016 \begin_layout Standard
11017 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11018 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11019 ) not to break the line at
11021 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11024 \begin_layout Quote
11025 Further documentation is given in section
11026 \begin_inset Newline newline
11030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11032 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11039 \begin_layout Standard
11040 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11055 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11064 A protected space is set with
11066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11067 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11069 \begin_inset space ~
11077 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11083 \begin_layout Subsection
11085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11087 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11092 \begin_inset Index idx
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 Spacing ! Horizontal
11104 \begin_layout Standard
11105 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11108 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11112 The length units are listed in Appendix
11113 \begin_inset space ~
11117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11119 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11130 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11135 \begin_inset Index idx
11138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11139 Spaces ! Inter-word
11147 \begin_layout Standard
11148 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11149 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11150 at the ends of sentences.
11151 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11152 automatically takes care about this.
11153 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11154 followed by a period; see section
11155 \begin_inset space ~
11159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11161 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11166 To insert a normal space, select
11168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11169 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11171 \begin_inset space ~
11179 arg "space-insert normal"
11185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11189 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11194 \begin_inset Index idx
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 \begin_layout Standard
11208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11215 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11224 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11225 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11226 inside abbreviations:
11229 \begin_layout Quote
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11239 or between values and units.
11240 Compare for example this:
11241 \begin_inset Newline newline
11245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 \begin_inset Newline newline
11252 10 kg (normal space
11255 \begin_layout Standard
11256 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11259 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11261 \begin_inset space ~
11269 arg "space-insert thin"
11275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11279 \begin_layout Standard
11280 You can also insert the following space types:
11283 \begin_layout Description
11285 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11287 \begin_inset space ~
11293 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11297 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11301 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11305 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11307 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11310 space between the arrows.
11311 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11315 \begin_layout Description
11317 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11319 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11323 \begin_inset space ~
11326 space A line with a
11327 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11331 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11335 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11339 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11341 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11344 space between the arrows.
11347 \begin_layout Description
11349 \begin_inset space ~
11353 \begin_inset space ~
11356 space A line with a
11357 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11361 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11365 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11368 negative thin space between the arrows.
11371 \begin_layout Description
11373 \begin_inset space ~
11377 \begin_inset space ~
11380 space A line with a
11381 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11385 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11389 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11392 negative medium space between the arrows.
11395 \begin_layout Description
11397 \begin_inset space ~
11401 \begin_inset space ~
11404 space A line with a
11405 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11409 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11413 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11416 negative thick space between the arrows.
11419 \begin_layout Description
11421 \begin_inset space ~
11425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11429 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11433 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11437 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11441 \begin_inset space ~
11445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11448 em) space between the arrows.
11451 \begin_layout Description
11453 \begin_inset space ~
11457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11461 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11465 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11469 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11473 \begin_inset space ~
11477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11480 em) space between the arrows.
11483 \begin_layout Description
11485 \begin_inset space ~
11489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11493 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11497 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11501 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11512 em) space between the arrows.
11515 \begin_layout Description
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11525 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11530 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11537 cm space between the arrows.
11540 \begin_layout Standard
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11548 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11552 lists the different space sizes.
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11556 \begin_inset Float table
11563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11564 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11569 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11573 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 \begin_inset Tabular
11584 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11585 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11586 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11587 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11684 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11690 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11701 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11712 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11718 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11729 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11759 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11918 \begin_inset Index idx
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11930 \begin_layout Standard
11931 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11932 feature for adding extra space
11933 in a uniform fashion.
11934 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11935 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11936 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11937 equally between themselves.
11940 \begin_layout Standard
11941 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11944 \begin_layout Quote
11946 This is on the left side
11947 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11950 This is on the right
11953 \begin_layout Quote
11956 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11960 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11966 \begin_layout Quote
11969 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11977 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11983 \begin_layout Standard
11984 That was an example in the
11990 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11994 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11998 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12001 is one in a standard paragraph.
12002 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12006 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12009 \begin_layout Standard
12010 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12013 \begin_inset space ~
12018 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12021 \begin_layout Standard
12023 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12027 \begin_inset space ~
12033 \begin_layout Standard
12035 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12039 \begin_inset space ~
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12047 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12051 \begin_inset space ~
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12063 \begin_inset space ~
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12071 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12073 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12077 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12078 (= opened downwards)
12081 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12085 \begin_inset space ~
12091 \begin_layout Standard
12093 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12095 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12099 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12103 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12107 \begin_inset space ~
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12114 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12122 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12126 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12128 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12129 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12133 option in the space dialog.
12141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12145 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12150 \begin_inset Index idx
12153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12162 \begin_layout Standard
12163 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12164 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12167 \begin_layout Standard
12168 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12171 What is correct English?:
12172 \begin_inset Newline newline
12176 \begin_inset Newline newline
12180 \begin_inset space ~
12183 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12184 \begin_inset Newline newline
12188 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12199 \begin_inset Newline newline
12203 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12214 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12220 \begin_layout Standard
12222 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12227 \begin_inset space ~
12231 \begin_inset space ~
12235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12239 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12242 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12263 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12272 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12273 That is why it is named
12274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12282 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12283 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12287 \begin_layout Subsection
12289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12291 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12296 \begin_inset Index idx
12299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12308 \begin_layout Standard
12309 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12312 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12314 \begin_inset space ~
12320 There you find the following sizes:
12323 \begin_layout Standard
12336 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12337 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12342 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12345 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12347 \begin_inset space ~
12353 \begin_inset Index idx
12356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 Document ! Settings
12362 for the paragraph separation.
12363 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12372 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12376 \begin_layout Standard
12378 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12387 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12388 size including line spacing.
12393 \begin_layout Standard
12399 \begin_inset Index idx
12402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12408 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12409 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12414 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12415 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12424 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12433 s are described in section
12434 \begin_inset space ~
12438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12440 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12449 If there are several
12453 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12454 You can therefore use
12458 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12461 \begin_layout Standard
12466 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12467 \begin_inset space ~
12471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12473 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12480 \begin_layout Standard
12481 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12491 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12492 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12504 \begin_layout Subsection
12505 Paragraph Alignment
12506 \begin_inset Index idx
12509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12510 Paragraph ! Alignment
12518 \begin_layout Standard
12519 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12521 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12524 dialog (toolbar button
12527 arg "layout-paragraph"
12531 There are five possibilities:
12534 \begin_layout Itemize
12542 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12548 \begin_layout Itemize
12556 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12562 \begin_layout Itemize
12570 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12576 \begin_layout Itemize
12584 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12590 \begin_layout Itemize
12598 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12605 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12606 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12607 the left and right margins.
12608 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12611 \begin_layout Standard
12613 This paragraph is right aligned,
12616 \begin_layout Standard
12618 this one is centered,
12621 \begin_layout Standard
12623 this one is left aligned.
12626 \begin_layout Subsection
12628 \begin_inset Index idx
12631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12632 Page breaks ! Forced
12638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12640 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12647 \begin_layout Standard
12648 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12650 force a page break where you want one.
12651 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 is good at page breaking.
12653 Only if you use a lot of
12657 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12658 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12661 \begin_layout Standard
12662 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12663 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12667 have to change the page breaking.
12670 \begin_layout Standard
12671 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12673 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12678 \begin_inset space ~
12684 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12686 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12687 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12689 \begin_inset space ~
12694 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12696 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12697 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12700 \begin_layout Standard
12701 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12702 at the top of a page.
12703 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12705 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12706 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12707 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12711 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12715 to learn more about
12722 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12726 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12731 \begin_inset Index idx
12734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12735 Page breaks ! Clear
12743 \begin_layout Standard
12744 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12745 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12746 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12747 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12748 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12751 \begin_layout Standard
12752 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12755 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12757 \begin_inset space ~
12763 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12768 \begin_inset space ~
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12777 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12778 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12781 \begin_layout Subsection
12783 \begin_inset Index idx
12786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12795 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12802 \begin_layout Standard
12803 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12805 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12808 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12822 arg "newline-insert newline"
12826 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12829 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12831 \begin_inset space ~
12835 \begin_inset space ~
12843 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12846 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12848 This is useful to avoid
12849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12856 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12859 \begin_layout Standard
12860 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12861 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12863 very good at line breaking.
12864 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12865 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12866 \begin_inset space ~
12870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12872 reference "sec:Quote"
12877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12879 reference "sec:Verse"
12884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12886 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12893 \begin_layout Subsection
12895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12897 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12902 \begin_inset Index idx
12905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12914 \begin_layout Standard
12916 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12927 \begin_layout Standard
12931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12932 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12939 you can insert horizontal lines.
12940 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12941 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12942 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12945 \begin_layout Standard
12947 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12958 \begin_layout Section
12959 Characters and Symbols
12962 \begin_layout Standard
12963 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12964 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12965 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12973 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12977 for information on how this is done.
12980 \begin_layout Standard
12981 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12986 dialog via the menu
12988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12989 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12995 \begin_layout Standard
12996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13004 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13005 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13007 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13015 \begin_layout Section
13016 Fonts and Text Styles
13017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13019 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13026 \begin_layout Subsection
13028 \begin_inset Index idx
13031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13040 \begin_layout Standard
13041 There are two types of fonts:
13044 \begin_layout Description
13046 \begin_inset space ~
13050 \begin_inset Index idx
13053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13059 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13064 characters) in the font.
13065 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13066 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13067 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13068 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13069 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13070 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13071 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13072 \begin_inset Newline newline
13075 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13076 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13077 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13078 sizes than at small ones.
13079 \begin_inset Newline newline
13093 \begin_inset space ~
13101 \begin_layout Description
13103 \begin_inset space ~
13107 \begin_inset Index idx
13110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13116 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13117 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13118 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13119 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13120 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13121 image manipulation program.
13122 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13123 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13127 pixels high up to 34
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13131 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13132 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13133 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13135 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13136 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13137 \begin_inset Newline newline
13140 Bitmap fonts are named
13143 \begin_inset space ~
13148 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13151 \begin_layout Standard
13152 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13153 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13154 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13155 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13156 use scalable fonts.
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13160 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13163 \begin_layout Standard
13164 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13168 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13171 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13172 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13173 font to emphasize text, you use an
13174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13182 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13184 In \SpecialChar LyX
13185 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13189 \begin_layout Subsection
13192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13194 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13201 \begin_layout Standard
13202 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13203 used its own fonts.
13204 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13205 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13208 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13209 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13210 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13211 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13212 to a word processor.
13213 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13214 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13215 files are very portable across
13216 different machines.
13217 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13218 has increased a lot
13219 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13222 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13224 \begin_inset space ~
13228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13230 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13235 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13236 code in the document
13237 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13240 \begin_layout Standard
13241 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13242 engines that are also able directly
13243 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13245 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13247 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13249 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13250 that is installed on your system.
13251 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13254 \begin_layout Standard
13255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13263 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13264 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13272 \begin_layout Subsection
13273 Document Font and Font size
13274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13276 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13281 \begin_inset Index idx
13284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13291 \begin_inset Index idx
13294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13303 \begin_layout Standard
13304 You can set the document fonts in the
13306 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13310 \begin_inset Index idx
13313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13314 Document ! Settings
13324 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13325 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13337 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13339 \begin_inset space ~
13342 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13345 \begin_layout Standard
13350 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13351 This requires that you use
13363 as the output format, i.
13364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13368 \begin_inset space \space{}
13371 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13372 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13373 installed (see section
13374 \begin_inset space ~
13378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13380 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13385 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13387 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13388 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13390 \begin_inset space ~
13393 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13394 cannot determine the family.
13395 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13396 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13399 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13402 \begin_layout Standard
13403 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13404 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13409 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13415 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13417 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13419 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13422 font encoding, this is
13423 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13424 , depending on the document language,
13427 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13428 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13436 \begin_inset space ~
13442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13452 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13453 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13461 \begin_inset space ~
13467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13475 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13496 European Computer Modern
13499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13507 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13510 \begin_layout Standard
13515 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13516 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13521 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13524 \begin_inset space ~
13529 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13535 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13536 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13539 \begin_layout Itemize
13543 \begin_inset space ~
13548 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13561 \begin_inset space ~
13566 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13567 community in order to replace
13571 as the default font.
13572 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13573 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13576 \begin_inset space ~
13589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13590 One difference is improved kerning.
13598 \begin_layout Itemize
13599 If you do not like the look of
13607 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13612 \begin_inset space ~
13618 \begin_inset space ~
13628 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13629 \begin_inset space ~
13632 serif and typewriter fonts,
13636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13637 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13644 \begin_inset space ~
13653 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13658 \begin_inset space \space{}
13666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13670 \begin_inset space \space{}
13676 \begin_inset space ~
13684 \begin_inset space ~
13694 but you can also select your own.
13695 \begin_inset Newline newline
13698 The differences between roman,
13701 \begin_inset space ~
13710 fonts are explained in section
13711 \begin_inset space ~
13715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13717 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13722 \begin_inset Newline newline
13728 \begin_inset space ~
13733 was originally designed for newspapers.
13734 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13735 into the small newspaper columns.
13739 \begin_inset space ~
13744 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13747 \begin_layout Standard
13748 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13761 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13766 depends on the class you are using.
13767 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13770 \begin_layout Standard
13771 Note that the font size is the
13776 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13777 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13778 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13779 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13782 \begin_inset space ~
13788 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13789 \begin_inset space ~
13793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13795 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13802 \begin_layout Standard
13806 \begin_inset space ~
13811 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13816 serif or typewriter.
13821 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13831 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13834 \begin_layout Standard
13839 LaTeX font encoding
13841 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13842 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13848 \begin_inset Index idx
13851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13859 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13861 \begin_inset space ~
13865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13867 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13874 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13875 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13876 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13880 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13888 \begin_layout Standard
13889 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13891 Use Old Style Figures
13895 Use True Small Caps
13898 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13901 Use Old Style Figures
13903 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13905 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13913 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13917 Use True Small Caps
13919 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13920 of scaled capitals.
13921 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13922 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13923 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13927 \begin_layout Standard
13929 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13930 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13931 provided by the font package (or the
13935 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13940 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13946 \begin_layout Standard
13951 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13952 a font to display the script characters.
13956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13957 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13963 \begin_inset Index idx
13966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13973 So this has no effect for the document language
13989 \begin_layout Standard
13992 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13994 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13995 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14001 \begin_inset Index idx
14004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14006 packages ! microtype
14015 \begin_layout Standard
14018 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14020 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14025 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14026 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14032 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14033 \begin_inset space ~
14037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14039 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14049 \begin_layout Standard
14050 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14054 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14062 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14067 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14068 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14070 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14072 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14075 dialog, see section
14076 \begin_inset space ~
14080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14082 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14094 \begin_layout Subsection
14098 \begin_layout Standard
14099 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14100 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14102 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14103 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14104 choose a math font in the dialog
14106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14110 \begin_inset Index idx
14113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14114 Document ! Settings
14120 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14121 automatically selects a math font.
14122 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14123 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14132 \begin_inset space ~
14138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14143 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14144 document font is available.
14147 \begin_layout Standard
14148 Note that the math font will not be used for
14152 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14158 or by the insertion of the command
14165 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14166 \begin_inset space ~
14170 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14171 while the math characters do not.
14173 \begin_inset space ~
14176 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14179 \begin_inset space ~
14187 \begin_inset space ~
14192 in the document font settings.
14195 \begin_layout Standard
14196 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14197 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14198 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14199 font (in most cases
14200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14206 \begin_inset space ~
14212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14215 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14216 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14224 \begin_inset space ~
14230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14236 \begin_layout Subsection
14238 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14240 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14244 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14248 name "subsec:charstyles"
14255 \begin_inset Index idx
14258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14265 \begin_inset Index idx
14268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14277 \begin_layout Standard
14278 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14279 automatically changes the
14280 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14283 style for certain paragraph environments.
14285 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14286 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14288 This is where we meet the concept of
14294 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14296 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14300 \begin_layout Standard
14302 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14307 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14309 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14322 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14331 e., available with all document classes.
14332 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14336 for specific purposes.
14337 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14340 \begin_layout Standard
14342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14343 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14353 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14357 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14370 — you customized the
14375 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14376 among them, encourage the use of
14388 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14389 \begin_inset space ~
14393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14395 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14400 Rather than fiddling with
14404 , they encourage the use of
14408 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14413 \begin_inset Quotes els
14417 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14420 ), not their form (
14421 \begin_inset Quotes els
14425 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14429 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14430 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14431 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14432 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14433 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14434 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14440 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14444 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14445 With a semantic markup (such as
14449 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14454 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14456 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14457 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14460 \begin_layout Standard
14462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14463 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14464 by \SpecialChar LyX
14470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14472 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14473 Builtin Text Styles
14474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14476 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14483 \begin_layout Standard
14485 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14486 The two builtin text styles can be
14487 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14495 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14496 both of these styles
14499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14507 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14513 \begin_layout Standard
14518 style, do one of the following:
14521 \begin_layout Itemize
14522 click on the toolbar button
14531 \begin_layout Itemize
14532 use the key binding
14539 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14543 \begin_layout Itemize
14545 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14553 arg "dialog-show character"
14559 arg "dialog-show character"
14562 ) as described in section
14563 \begin_inset space ~
14567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14569 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14578 \begin_layout Standard
14579 These commands are all toggles.
14584 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14587 \begin_layout Standard
14588 One typically uses the
14592 style for proper names.
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14611 \begin_layout Standard
14613 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14618 is producing text in
14622 , but the definition can be changed.
14627 \begin_layout Standard
14629 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14631 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14639 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14646 \begin_layout Itemize
14647 clicking on the toolbar button
14656 \begin_layout Itemize
14657 using the keybindings
14664 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14668 \begin_layout Itemize
14670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14678 arg "dialog-show character"
14684 arg "dialog-show character"
14687 ) as described in section
14688 \begin_inset space ~
14692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14694 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14703 \begin_layout Standard
14708 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14712 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14715 packages use a different font
14716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14717 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14723 \begin_layout Standard
14724 We've been using the
14728 style all over the place in this document.
14729 Here's one more example:
14732 \begin_layout Quotation
14736 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14738 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14744 \begin_layout Standard
14745 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14746 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14747 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14748 the common tendency to overuse
14749 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14751 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14756 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14758 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14762 \begin_layout Standard
14764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14765 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14766 only as font changes and integrated in the
14774 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14777 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14784 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14786 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14790 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14793 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14795 \begin_inset space ~
14798 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14806 arg "dialog-show character"
14812 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14814 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14820 arg "dialog-show character"
14824 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14834 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14841 \begin_layout Standard
14843 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14844 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14846 \begin_inset space ~
14850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14852 reference "subsec:Modules"
14859 ), or local layout settings (see section
14860 \begin_inset space ~
14864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14866 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14871 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14875 markup for specific functions.
14876 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14881 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14891 \begin_inset Quotes els
14895 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14901 \begin_layout Standard
14903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14904 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14906 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14912 \begin_layout Standard
14914 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14915 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14920 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14921 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14922 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14927 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14928 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14933 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14941 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14942 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14943 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14944 \begin_inset Flex Code
14947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14949 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14958 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14963 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14972 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14986 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14987 on screen their formal appearance.
14992 \begin_layout Subsection
14994 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14996 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15006 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15014 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15016 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15022 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15027 \begin_inset Index idx
15030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15039 \begin_layout Standard
15040 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15041 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15044 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15046 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15048 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15052 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15053 the properties of text passages
15054 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15058 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15059 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15060 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15061 from ordinary dialog.
15062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15066 \begin_layout Standard
15068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15069 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15070 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15071 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15072 the properties of the respective text passages.
15077 comes in as a last resort.
15082 \begin_layout Standard
15083 Before we document how to
15084 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15085 use custom character style
15086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15087 tweak the text properties
15089 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15090 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15096 \begin_inset Newline newline
15099 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15100 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15103 \begin_layout Standard
15105 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15106 use custom character styles
15107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15108 tweak text properties
15111 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15116 \begin_inset space ~
15119 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15127 arg "dialog-show character"
15132 dialog or press the toolbar button
15135 arg "dialog-show character"
15140 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15143 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15144 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15146 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15149 property that you can choose.
15150 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15153 \begin_inset space ~
15158 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15160 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15171 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15172 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15173 environments all at once.
15176 \begin_layout Standard
15178 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15180 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15183 properties, and their options (in addition to
15186 \begin_inset space ~
15192 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15196 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15204 \begin_layout Labeling
15205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15219 The possible options are:
15223 \begin_layout Labeling
15224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15229 This is the Roman font family.
15230 Normally a serif font.
15231 It's also the default family.
15241 \begin_layout Labeling
15242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15246 \begin_inset space ~
15253 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15265 \begin_layout Labeling
15266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15273 This is the Typewriter font family.
15279 arg "font-typewriter"
15285 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15289 \begin_layout Standard
15291 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15292 The general differences of these families are:
15295 \begin_layout Itemize
15297 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15302 fonts use characters with serifs.
15303 These are the small
15304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15311 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15312 The following example shows the difference:
15313 \begin_inset Newline newline
15317 \begin_inset Newline newline
15322 text without serifs
15325 \begin_inset Newline newline
15328 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15329 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15336 \begin_layout Itemize
15338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15343 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15344 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15345 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15348 \begin_layout Itemize
15350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15363 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15381 \begin_inset Newline newline
15385 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15403 \begin_inset Note Note
15406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15408 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15409 For more on phantoms see section
15410 \begin_inset space ~
15414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15416 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15426 \begin_inset Newline newline
15435 \begin_layout Labeling
15436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15441 This corresponds to the print weight.
15446 \begin_layout Labeling
15447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15452 This is the Medium font series.
15453 It's also the default series.
15456 \begin_layout Labeling
15457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15464 This is the Bold font series.
15477 \begin_layout Labeling
15478 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15483 As the name implies.
15488 \begin_layout Labeling
15489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15494 This is the Upright font shape.
15495 It's also the default shape.
15498 \begin_layout Labeling
15499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15509 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15514 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15519 s the Italic font shape
15525 \begin_layout Labeling
15526 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15533 This is the Slanted font shape
15535 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15536 , this is different from italic).
15539 \begin_layout Labeling
15540 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15544 \begin_inset space ~
15551 This is the Small caps font shape
15558 \begin_layout Labeling
15559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15564 Alters the text color.
15565 Note that not all DVI
15566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15568 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15571 viewers are able to display colors.
15573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15577 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15579 \begin_inset space ~
15586 , which means that the document default color set in
15588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15589 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15595 \begin_inset space ~
15601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15607 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15687 \begin_inset Index idx
15690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15697 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15703 \begin_layout Labeling
15704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15709 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15710 the language of the document.
15711 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15713 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15716 in blue to indicate the change
15717 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15718 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15722 \begin_inset Newline newline
15725 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15727 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15728 When using the spell checking (see section
15729 \begin_inset space ~
15733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15735 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15739 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15740 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15742 \begin_inset Newline newline
15745 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15747 Exclude from Spellchecking
15750 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15753 \begin_layout Labeling
15754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15759 Alters the size of the font.
15761 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15763 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15770 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15771 document font size.
15772 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15773 the details, but a general description of what
15779 \begin_layout Labeling
15780 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15801 arg "font-size tiny"
15807 \begin_layout Labeling
15808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15829 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15835 \begin_layout Labeling
15836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15857 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15863 \begin_layout Labeling
15864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15885 arg "font-size small"
15891 \begin_layout Labeling
15892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15906 It's also the default size.
15910 arg "font-size normal"
15916 \begin_layout Labeling
15917 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15938 arg "font-size large"
15944 \begin_layout Labeling
15945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15966 arg "font-size larger"
15972 \begin_layout Labeling
15973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15994 arg "font-size largest"
16000 \begin_layout Labeling
16001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16022 arg "font-size huge"
16028 \begin_layout Labeling
16029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16050 arg "font-size giant"
16056 \begin_layout Labeling
16057 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16062 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16082 arg "font-size increase"
16088 \begin_layout Labeling
16089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16094 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16114 arg "font-size decrease"
16121 \begin_layout Standard
16126 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16127 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16129 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16130 — use those instead.
16131 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16134 \begin_layout Labeling
16135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16137 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16141 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16147 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16148 change a few other things at the character level
16149 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16150 have text passages being underlined
16154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16155 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16156 days, when you could not change fonts.
16157 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16158 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16159 because some people
16163 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16170 \begin_layout Labeling
16171 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16173 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16180 This is text with emphasize on
16183 This might seem like the same as
16187 , but it is actually a bit different.
16193 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16195 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16196 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16200 \begin_layout Labeling
16201 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16203 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16208 Don't use underlining.
16213 \begin_layout Labeling
16214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16216 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16220 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16228 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16230 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16239 arg "font-underline"
16245 \begin_inset Newline newline
16249 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16252 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16253 when you could not change fonts.
16254 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16255 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16256 because some people
16260 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16265 \begin_layout Labeling
16266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16270 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16272 \begin_inset space ~
16281 This is text with Double under
16282 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16284 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16293 arg "font-underunderline"
16297 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16299 \begin_inset Newline newline
16302 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16303 about double underbar
16308 \begin_layout Labeling
16309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16313 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16315 \begin_inset space ~
16324 This is text with Wavy under
16325 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16327 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16336 arg "font-underwave"
16340 \begin_inset Newline newline
16343 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16344 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16350 \begin_layout Labeling
16351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16353 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16358 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16364 \begin_layout Labeling
16365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16372 Don't use strikethrough.
16375 \begin_layout Labeling
16376 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16380 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16382 \begin_inset space ~
16386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16394 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16396 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16397 Single strikethrough
16405 arg "font-strikeout"
16409 \begin_inset Newline newline
16412 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16413 changed in the meantime.
16416 \begin_layout Labeling
16417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16419 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16423 \begin_inset space ~
16427 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16429 \begin_inset space ~
16433 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16441 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16443 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16449 \begin_inset Newline newline
16452 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16456 \begin_layout Standard
16458 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16459 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16460 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16461 \begin_inset space ~
16465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16467 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16474 \begin_layout Itemize
16476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16483 This is text with emphasize on
16488 \begin_layout Itemize
16492 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16499 This is text with Noun on.
16501 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16508 , this is a logical attribute.
16509 Normally it's equivalent to
16512 \begin_inset space ~
16522 \begin_layout Standard
16523 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16524 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16526 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16531 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16532 chosen a new character style
16533 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16534 applied a text property
16537 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16540 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16542 \begin_inset space ~
16545 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16553 arg "dialog-show character"
16561 arg "dialog-show character"
16564 ) dialog, the settings are
16565 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16569 You can activate the
16570 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16573 last applied properties
16575 by using the toolbar button
16578 arg "textstyle-apply"
16582 The button lets you apply
16583 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16584 your custom character style
16585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16588 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16590 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16591 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16592 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16593 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16599 To completely reset the
16600 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16602 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16603 text properties of a selection
16605 to the default, use
16606 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16608 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16618 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16623 from the menu of the toolbar button
16626 arg "textstyle-apply"
16633 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16634 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16635 you just set the shape to
16636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16654 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_layout Standard
16670 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16671 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16679 \begin_inset space ~
16691 \begin_layout Itemize
16693 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16706 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16724 \begin_inset Newline newline
16728 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16742 \begin_inset Note Note
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16746 For more on phantoms see section
16747 \begin_inset space ~
16751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16753 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16763 \begin_inset Newline newline
16769 \begin_layout Itemize
16771 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16776 fonts use characters with serifs.
16777 These are the small
16778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16785 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16786 The following example shows the difference:
16787 \begin_inset Newline newline
16791 \begin_inset Newline newline
16796 text without serifs
16799 \begin_inset Newline newline
16802 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16803 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16810 \begin_layout Itemize
16812 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16817 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16818 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16819 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16824 \begin_layout Standard
16826 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16834 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16835 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16838 \begin_inset space ~
16843 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16844 the property to be removed.
16845 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16846 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16847 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16865 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16866 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16874 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16878 \begin_inset space ~
16883 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16894 If you, for example, set
16895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16913 \begin_inset space ~
16918 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16927 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16932 \begin_layout Standard
16934 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16937 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16938 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16941 \begin_layout Section
16942 Printing and Previewing
16945 \begin_layout Subsection
16949 \begin_layout Standard
16950 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16951 using \SpecialChar LyX
16952 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16953 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16954 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16955 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16957 Additional Features
16962 \begin_layout Standard
16964 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16967 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16968 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16969 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16972 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16973 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16974 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16975 to turn your writing into printable output.
16976 This happens in two stages:
16979 \begin_layout Enumerate
16980 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16981 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16983 a file with the extension,
16984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16998 \begin_layout Enumerate
16999 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17000 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17001 to use the commands in the
17005 file to produce printable output.
17008 \begin_layout Subsection
17009 Output file formats
17010 \begin_inset Index idx
17013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17022 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17030 Simple text (ASCII)
17031 \begin_inset Index idx
17034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17035 File formats ! ASCII
17043 \begin_layout Standard
17044 This file type has the extension
17045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17057 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
17058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17061 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17068 \begin_layout Standard
17069 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
17071 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17072 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17074 \begin_inset space ~
17080 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17081 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17082 bibliography (section
17083 \begin_inset space ~
17087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17089 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17094 If your document includes such material, use
17096 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17097 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17099 \begin_inset space ~
17103 \begin_inset space ~
17107 \begin_inset space ~
17115 \begin_inset space ~
17119 \begin_inset space ~
17125 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17126 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
17129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17132 \begin_inset Index idx
17135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17136 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17145 \begin_layout Standard
17146 This file type has the extension
17147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17158 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17161 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17162 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17163 -Errors or to process it manually
17164 with console commands.
17165 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17166 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17167 's temporary directory whenever you
17168 view or export your document.
17171 \begin_layout Standard
17172 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17173 -file using the menu
17175 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17176 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17180 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17181 export variants are explained in section
17182 \begin_inset space ~
17186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17188 reference "subsec:Export"
17195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17197 \begin_inset Index idx
17200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17209 \begin_layout Standard
17210 This file type has the extension
17211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17231 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17232 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17233 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17238 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17239 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17240 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17241 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17242 when you view the DVI.
17243 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17246 \begin_layout Standard
17247 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17249 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17250 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17255 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17256 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17258 \begin_inset space ~
17264 The latter option uses the program
17266 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17272 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17275 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17276 font access (see section
17277 \begin_inset space ~
17281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17283 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17288 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17289 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17296 \begin_inset Index idx
17299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17300 File formats ! PostScript
17308 \begin_layout Standard
17309 This file type has the extension
17310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17322 PostScript was developed by the company
17326 as a printer language.
17327 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17329 PostScript can be seen as a
17330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17333 programming language
17334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17337 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17342 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17349 \begin_inset Index idx
17352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17354 packages ! pstricks
17364 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17367 \begin_layout Standard
17368 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17372 Encapsulated PostScript
17373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17376 (EPS, file extension
17377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17389 As \SpecialChar LyX
17390 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17391 convert them in the background to EPS.
17392 If, for example, you have 50
17393 \begin_inset space ~
17396 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17398 \begin_inset space ~
17401 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17402 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17404 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17405 EPS to avoid this problem.
17408 \begin_layout Standard
17409 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17411 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17412 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17418 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17420 \begin_inset Index idx
17423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17430 \begin_inset Index idx
17433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17442 \begin_layout Standard
17443 This file type has the extension
17444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17460 Portable Document Format
17461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17468 was derived from PostScript.
17469 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17478 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17479 looks exactly the same.
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17487 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17491 (JPG, file extension
17492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17519 Portable Network Graphics
17520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17523 (PNG, file extension
17524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17536 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17537 converts them in the
17538 background to one of these formats.
17539 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17540 will slow down your workflow.
17541 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17544 \begin_layout Standard
17545 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17547 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17553 \begin_layout Description
17555 \begin_inset space ~
17558 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17562 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17565 \begin_layout Description
17567 \begin_inset space ~
17574 ) This uses the program
17576 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17579 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17582 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17585 is a new engine, derived from
17589 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17590 access (see section
17591 \begin_inset space ~
17595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17597 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17602 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17603 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17608 \begin_layout Description
17610 \begin_inset space ~
17617 ) This uses the program
17622 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17628 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17629 font access (see section
17630 \begin_inset space ~
17634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17636 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17641 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17642 vertically written Japanese.
17645 \begin_layout Description
17647 \begin_inset space ~
17650 (cropped) This is the same as
17653 \begin_inset space ~
17658 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17659 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17660 to generate good-looking
17661 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17664 \begin_layout Description
17666 \begin_inset space ~
17669 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17673 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17677 \begin_layout Description
17679 \begin_inset space ~
17682 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17686 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17687 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17691 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17692 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17695 \begin_layout Standard
17699 \begin_inset space ~
17708 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17709 works without problems.
17710 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17711 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17715 \begin_inset space ~
17723 \begin_inset space ~
17728 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17738 \begin_inset Index idx
17741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17742 FileFormats ! XHTML
17748 \begin_inset Index idx
17751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17760 \begin_layout Standard
17761 This file type has the extension
17762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17774 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17775 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17776 When \SpecialChar LyX
17777 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17778 suitable for the purpose.
17779 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17782 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17785 between different formats, which are described in section
17787 Math Output in XHTML
17792 \begin_inset space ~
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 XHTML output remains
17802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17809 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17810 features are supported yet.
17814 and the World Wide Web
17818 Additional Features
17820 manual, for more information.
17823 \begin_layout Standard
17824 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17826 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17827 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17833 \begin_layout Subsection
17835 \begin_inset Index idx
17838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17847 \begin_layout Standard
17848 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17849 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17858 or use the toolbar button
17865 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17866 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17867 \begin_inset space ~
17871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17873 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17877 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17879 \begin_inset space ~
17883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17885 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17890 Further output formats can be selected via
17892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17893 View (Other Formats)
17895 or the toolbar button
17904 \begin_layout Standard
17905 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17906 viewer window using the menu
17908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17913 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17914 Update (Other Formats)
17919 \begin_layout Standard
17920 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17923 To have a real output, export your document.
17926 \begin_layout Section
17927 A few Words about Typography
17928 \begin_inset Index idx
17931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17940 \begin_layout Subsection
17941 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17942 \begin_inset Index idx
17945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17952 \begin_inset Index idx
17955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 \begin_layout Standard
17965 In \SpecialChar LyX
17967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17978 symbol comes in four variants: the
17995 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18001 \begin_layout Standard
18002 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18012 height_special "totalheight"
18017 backgroundcolor "none"
18020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18021 \begin_inset Tabular
18022 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18023 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18024 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18025 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18026 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18027 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18056 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18057 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18096 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18119 system key combination
18123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18124 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18136 and the em dash with
18139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18152 is the Mac label for the right
18162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18175 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 system key combination or
18199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18226 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18265 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18271 \begin_layout Standard
18272 Dashes can also be inserted with
18274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18276 \begin_inset space ~
18279 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18287 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18288 and 2014 for the en dash).
18291 \begin_layout Standard
18292 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18293 mode and has a length of its own.
18294 Here are some examples:
18297 \begin_layout Enumerate
18298 line- and page-breaks
18299 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18309 \begin_layout Enumerate
18311 \begin_inset space ~
18315 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18325 \begin_layout Enumerate
18326 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18327 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18337 \begin_layout Enumerate
18338 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18342 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18352 \begin_layout Standard
18354 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18356 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18357 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18365 \begin_layout Subsection
18366 Dashes and Line Breaks
18367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18369 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18376 \begin_layout Standard
18377 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18378 case and locale, e.
18379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18385 \begin_layout Itemize
18386 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18387 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18390 \begin_layout Itemize
18391 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18395 \begin_layout Itemize
18396 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18397 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18400 \begin_layout Standard
18401 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18402 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 allows line breaks after hyphens
18414 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18416 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18419 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18422 \begin_layout Enumerate
18423 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18424 \begin_inset space ~
18427 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18429 The Elements of Typographic Style
18432 \begin_inset space ~
18435 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18438 \begin_layout Enumerate
18439 Unwanted line breaks
18444 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18446 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18449 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 Prevent Hyphenation
18461 \begin_inset space ~
18477 in \SpecialChar TeX
18479 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18480 , a protected space does not suffice
18484 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18491 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18492 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18493 in the document language.
18494 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18508 \begin_layout Itemize
18510 \begin_inset space ~
18514 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18524 height_special "totalheight"
18529 backgroundcolor "none"
18532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18541 \begin_layout Itemize
18543 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18553 height_special "totalheight"
18558 backgroundcolor "none"
18561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18563 \begin_inset space ~
18571 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18572 \begin_inset space ~
18575 – sont très utiles.
18578 \begin_layout Itemize
18583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18592 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18596 \begin_layout Standard
18597 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18598 \begin_inset space ~
18601 – in contrast to an overfull line
18602 \begin_inset space ~
18605 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18609 \begin_layout Standard
18610 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18614 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18615 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18616 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18621 \begin_layout Enumerate
18622 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18623 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18624 or \SpecialChar TeX
18630 \begin_layout Itemize
18632 \begin_inset space ~
18635 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18636 \begin_inset space ~
18639 – sont très utiles.
18643 \begin_layout Enumerate
18644 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18645 \begin_inset Newline newline
18650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18651 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18653 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18655 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18657 \begin_inset space ~
18663 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18665 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18667 \begin_inset space ~
18678 \begin_layout Itemize
18679 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18680 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18681 should be followed by
18682 a line break opportunity.
18685 \begin_layout Standard
18686 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18687 \begin_inset space ~
18691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18693 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18704 \begin_layout Enumerate
18705 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18706 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18707 or en dashes (see section
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18714 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18725 Changes and backwards compatibility
18728 \begin_layout Standard
18729 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18734 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18735 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18744 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18745 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18753 \begin_layout Standard
18754 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18756 \begin_inset space ~
18759 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18761 prevents ligation to dashes.
18763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18770 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18775 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18776 after the input (unless the current text font is
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18785 The behavior was changed since
18786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18801 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18802 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18803 as non-breakable dashes.
18804 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18812 \begin_layout Standard
18815 \begin_inset space ~
18823 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18825 \begin_inset space ~
18828 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18831 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18832 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18833 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18834 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18836 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18840 If you used both literal and
18841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18848 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18850 \begin_inset space ~
18853 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18854 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18857 \begin_layout Subsection
18859 \begin_inset Index idx
18862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18871 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18878 \begin_layout Standard
18879 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18880 but automatically in the output.
18881 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18887 \begin_inset Index idx
18890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 following the rules of the document language.
18899 does not hyphenate text in the
18903 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18906 \begin_layout Standard
18908 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18912 font and with unusual constructs, like
18913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18921 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18922 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18923 This is done with the menu
18925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18926 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18928 \begin_inset space ~
18934 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18936 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18940 \begin_layout Standard
18941 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18942 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18953 would then see the hyphen
18954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18961 as a line break possibility.
18962 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18963 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18967 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18970 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18972 Prevent Hyphenation
18977 \begin_inset space ~
18985 \begin_layout Subsection
18987 \begin_inset Index idx
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19000 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19003 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19010 \begin_layout Standard
19011 When \SpecialChar LyX
19012 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19013 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19015 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19021 appropriate amount of space.
19022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19025 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19027 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19028 gets after another word.
19031 \begin_layout Standard
19032 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19033 not work in all cases.
19035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19046 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19047 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19050 \begin_layout Standard
19051 Here are some examples of
19055 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19058 \begin_layout Itemize
19063 \begin_layout Itemize
19068 \begin_layout Standard
19069 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19072 \begin_layout Itemize
19074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19078 this is too much space!
19081 \begin_layout Itemize
19086 \begin_layout Standard
19087 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19090 \begin_layout Standard
19091 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19094 \begin_layout Enumerate
19098 \begin_inset space ~
19103 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19104 \begin_inset space ~
19108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19110 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19115 \begin_inset Index idx
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19119 Spaces ! inter-word
19127 \begin_layout Enumerate
19131 \begin_inset space ~
19136 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19137 \begin_inset space ~
19141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19143 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19148 \begin_inset Index idx
19151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19160 \begin_layout Enumerate
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset space ~
19179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19181 \begin_inset space ~
19186 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19187 This function is also bound to
19190 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19196 \begin_layout Standard
19197 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19200 \begin_layout Itemize
19202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19206 \begin_inset space \space{}
19209 this is too much space!
19212 \begin_layout Itemize
19213 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19217 \begin_layout Standard
19218 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19219 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19221 will take care of this.
19224 \begin_layout Standard
19225 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19235 feature described in the section
19237 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19242 Additional Features
19247 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19249 \begin_inset Index idx
19252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19253 Typography ! Quotation marks
19259 \begin_inset Index idx
19262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19263 Quotation marks | see
19267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19293 \begin_layout Standard
19295 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19296 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19297 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19307 The keyboard character,
19311 , generates this automatically.
19314 \begin_layout Standard
19315 You can specify what character the
19319 key produces by using the submenu
19325 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19329 \begin_inset Index idx
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19333 Document ! Settings
19338 dialog and switching the
19342 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19343 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19345 \begin_inset space ~
19351 \begin_layout Labeling
19352 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19364 \begin_inset space ~
19368 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset Quotes els
19376 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19390 \begin_inset Quotes els
19394 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19397 quotation marks (as common, e.
19398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19404 \begin_layout Labeling
19405 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19408 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19412 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19416 \begin_inset space ~
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19424 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19428 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19434 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19438 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19442 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19446 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19449 quotation marks (as common, e.
19450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19456 \begin_layout Labeling
19457 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19460 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19464 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19468 \begin_inset space ~
19472 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19480 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19486 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19490 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19494 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19498 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19501 quotation marks (as common, e.
19502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19508 \begin_layout Labeling
19509 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19512 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19516 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19520 \begin_inset space ~
19524 \begin_inset space ~
19528 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19532 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19538 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19542 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19546 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19550 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19553 quotation marks (as common, e.
19554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19560 \begin_layout Labeling
19561 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19564 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19568 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19572 \begin_inset space ~
19576 \begin_inset space ~
19580 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19584 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19590 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19594 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19598 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19602 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19605 quotation marks (as common, e.
19606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19609 g., in Switzerland)
19612 \begin_layout Labeling
19613 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19616 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19620 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19624 \begin_inset space ~
19628 \begin_inset space ~
19632 \begin_inset Quotes als
19636 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19642 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19646 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19650 \begin_inset Quotes als
19654 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19657 quotation marks (as common, e.
19658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19664 \begin_layout Labeling
19665 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19668 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19672 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19676 \begin_inset space ~
19680 \begin_inset space ~
19684 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19688 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19694 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19698 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19702 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19706 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19709 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19712 \begin_layout Labeling
19713 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19716 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19720 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19724 \begin_inset space ~
19728 \begin_inset space ~
19732 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19736 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19742 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19746 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19750 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19754 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19757 quotation marks (as common, e.
19758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19761 g., in Great Britain)
19764 \begin_layout Labeling
19765 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19768 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19772 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19784 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19788 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19794 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19798 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19802 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19806 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19809 quotation marks (as common, e.
19810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19816 \begin_layout Labeling
19817 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19820 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19824 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19828 \begin_inset space ~
19832 \begin_inset space ~
19836 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19840 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19846 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19850 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19854 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19858 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19861 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19867 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19868 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19869 the inner marks differ).
19877 \begin_layout Labeling
19878 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19881 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19885 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19889 \begin_inset space ~
19893 \begin_inset space ~
19897 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19901 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19907 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19911 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19915 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19919 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19922 quotation marks (as common, e.
19923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19929 \begin_layout Labeling
19930 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19933 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19937 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19941 \begin_inset space ~
19945 \begin_inset space ~
19949 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19953 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19959 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19963 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19967 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19971 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19974 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19977 \begin_layout Labeling
19978 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19979 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19987 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19993 \begin_inset space ~
19997 \begin_inset space ~
20003 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20011 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20015 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20019 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20023 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20027 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20030 quotation marks (as common, e.
20031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20040 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20048 \begin_layout Labeling
20049 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20050 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20058 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20064 \begin_inset space ~
20068 \begin_inset space ~
20074 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20082 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20086 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20090 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20094 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20098 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20101 quotation marks (as common, e.
20102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20105 g., in North Korea and China)
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20111 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20119 \begin_layout Standard
20120 Inner quotation marks
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20125 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20126 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20127 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20135 does not necessarily mean
20136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20144 This is why we call them
20145 \begin_inset Quotes els
20149 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20165 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20167 \begin_inset Quotes els
20171 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20174 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20177 arg "quote-insert inner"
20182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20188 \begin_layout Standard
20189 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20190 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20191 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20192 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20193 If you check the setting
20195 Use dynamic quotation marks
20199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20203 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20204 they appear in a special color).
20205 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20206 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20211 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20214 \begin_layout Standard
20215 Individual quotation marks (i.
20216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20219 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20220 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20224 \begin_layout Subsection
20226 \begin_inset Index idx
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 Typography ! Ligatures
20236 \begin_inset Index idx
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20270 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20277 \begin_layout Standard
20278 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20279 print them as single characters.
20280 These groups are known as
20285 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20286 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20288 Here are the standard ligatures:
20291 \begin_layout Itemize
20295 \begin_layout Itemize
20299 \begin_layout Itemize
20303 \begin_layout Itemize
20307 \begin_layout Itemize
20311 \begin_layout Standard
20312 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20315 \begin_layout Standard
20316 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20317 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20325 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20341 To break a ligature, use
20343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20344 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20346 \begin_inset space ~
20353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20364 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20381 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20389 \begin_layout Subsection
20391 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20393 \begin_inset Index idx
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20406 \begin_layout Standard
20409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20410 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20414 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20417 \begin_layout Description
20419 The name of the game.
20422 \begin_layout Description
20424 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20428 \begin_layout Description
20430 The \SpecialChar TeX
20431 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20435 \begin_layout Description
20436 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20437 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20441 \begin_layout Standard
20442 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20448 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20456 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20457 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20458 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20459 converges to the number
20460 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20463 : The actual version is
20464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20472 , the previous one was
20473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20484 \begin_layout Subsection
20486 \begin_inset Index idx
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 \begin_layout Standard
20499 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20500 space between two words.
20501 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20511 for units use the menu
20513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20514 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20516 \begin_inset space ~
20524 arg "space-insert thin"
20530 \begin_layout Standard
20531 Here is an example to show the differences:
20534 \begin_layout Standard
20535 \begin_inset Tabular
20536 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20537 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20538 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20539 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20546 \begin_inset space ~
20550 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 space between number and unit
20569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20578 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 half space between number and unit
20603 \begin_layout Subsection
20605 \begin_inset Index idx
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20617 \begin_layout Standard
20618 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20620 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20621 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20622 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20623 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20624 These bits of text became known as
20635 \begin_layout Standard
20636 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20637 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20638 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20639 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20640 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20641 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20642 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20643 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20644 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20645 \begin_inset Newline newline
20653 \begin_inset Newline newline
20661 \begin_inset Newline newline
20664 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20665 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20666 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20668 \begin_inset space ~
20672 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20674 key "latexcompanion"
20680 \begin_inset space ~
20684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20691 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20692 's page break mechanism.
20695 \begin_layout Chapter
20696 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20699 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20706 \begin_layout Standard
20707 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20710 \begin_inset space ~
20716 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20719 \begin_layout Section
20721 \begin_inset Index idx
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20740 \begin_layout Standard
20742 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20745 \begin_layout Description
20748 \begin_inset space ~
20751 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20752 \begin_inset Newline newline
20756 \begin_inset Note Note
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20768 \begin_layout Description
20769 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20770 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20771 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20774 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20775 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20777 \begin_inset space ~
20783 \begin_inset Newline newline
20787 \begin_inset Note Comment
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20800 \begin_layout Description
20802 \begin_inset space ~
20805 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20806 set in the document settings under
20808 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20810 \begin_inset space ~
20816 \begin_inset Newline newline
20820 \begin_inset Newline newline
20824 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20834 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20839 of a comment that appears in the output.
20845 \begin_inset Newline newline
20849 \begin_inset Newline newline
20852 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20855 \begin_layout Standard
20856 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20868 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20871 \begin_layout Section
20873 \begin_inset Index idx
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20885 name "sec:Footnotes"
20892 \begin_layout Standard
20894 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20900 or the toolbar button
20903 arg "footnote-insert"
20915 \begin_inset Graphics
20916 filename clipart/footnote.png
20925 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20926 's representation of your footnote.
20936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20955 label, the box will
20959 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20960 Clicking on the box label again will close
20973 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20974 and click on the footnote
20989 \begin_layout Standard
20990 Here is an example footnote:
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21007 \begin_layout Standard
21008 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21009 position where the footnote box is placed.
21010 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21011 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21012 according to the document class.
21014 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21015 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21021 ey are described in the
21024 \begin_inset space ~
21032 \begin_layout Section
21034 \begin_inset Index idx
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21046 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21053 \begin_layout Standard
21054 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21056 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21060 \begin_inset space ~
21065 or the toolbar button
21068 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21094 appearing within your text.
21095 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21096 's representation of your margin
21105 \begin_layout Standard
21106 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21110 \begin_inset Marginal
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 This is a marginal note.
21123 \begin_layout Standard
21124 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21125 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21126 pages, right on odd pages.
21129 \begin_layout Standard
21130 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21133 \begin_inset space ~
21141 \begin_inset space ~
21149 \begin_layout Section
21150 Graphics and Images
21151 \begin_inset Index idx
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 \begin_inset Index idx
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21173 name "sec:Graphics"
21180 \begin_layout Standard
21181 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21182 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21185 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21194 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21197 \begin_layout Standard
21198 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21203 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21204 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21206 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21207 \begin_inset space ~
21211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21213 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21220 \begin_layout Standard
21225 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21226 of the image in the output.
21227 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21231 \begin_inset space ~
21235 \begin_inset space ~
21244 \begin_inset space ~
21248 \begin_inset space ~
21252 \begin_inset space ~
21257 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21258 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21266 \begin_layout Standard
21270 \begin_inset space ~
21274 \begin_inset space ~
21279 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21280 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21282 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21287 \begin_inset space ~
21292 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21293 with the image size is printed.
21296 \begin_layout Standard
21297 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21298 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21300 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21303 \begin_layout Standard
21305 \begin_inset Graphics
21306 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21314 \begin_layout Standard
21315 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21316 the image into a float, see section
21317 \begin_inset space ~
21321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21323 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21330 \begin_layout Subsection
21332 \begin_inset Index idx
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21344 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21351 \begin_layout Standard
21352 You can insert images in any known file format.
21353 But as we explained in section
21354 \begin_inset space ~
21358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21360 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21364 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21366 therefore uses the program
21370 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21371 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21372 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21373 \begin_inset space ~
21377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21379 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21386 \begin_layout Standard
21387 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21390 \begin_layout Description
21392 \begin_inset space ~
21395 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21396 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21397 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21401 Graphics Interchange Format
21402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21405 (GIF, file extension
21406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21418 \begin_inset Index idx
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21453 Portable Network Graphics
21454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21457 (PNG, file extension
21458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21470 \begin_inset Index idx
21473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21505 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21509 (JPG, file extension
21510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21534 \begin_inset Index idx
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21568 \begin_layout Description
21570 \begin_inset space ~
21573 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21575 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21576 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21577 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21578 \begin_inset Newline newline
21581 Scalable image formats can be
21582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21585 Scalable Vector Graphics
21586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21589 (SVG, file extension
21590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21602 \begin_inset Index idx
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21637 Encapsulated PostScript
21638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21641 (EPS, file extension
21642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21654 \begin_inset Index idx
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21689 Portable Document Format
21690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21693 (PDF, file extension
21694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21706 \begin_inset Index idx
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21724 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21725 result will not be scalable.
21726 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21740 \begin_layout Standard
21741 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21748 \begin_layout Subsection
21749 Grouping of Image Settings
21750 \begin_inset Index idx
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21754 Images ! Settings grouping
21762 \begin_layout Standard
21763 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21765 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21766 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21768 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21769 need to manually change each of them.
21772 \begin_layout Standard
21773 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21776 \begin_inset space ~
21780 \begin_inset space ~
21792 \begin_inset space ~
21796 \begin_inset space ~
21802 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21803 and checking the name of the desired group.
21806 \begin_layout Section
21808 \begin_inset Index idx
21811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21827 \begin_layout Standard
21828 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21831 arg "tabular-insert"
21836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21840 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21841 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21842 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21845 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21846 from the rest of the table.
21847 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21848 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21850 Here is an example table:
21853 \begin_layout Standard
21855 \begin_inset Tabular
21856 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21857 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21858 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21859 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22059 \begin_layout Standard
22061 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22062 This corresponds to the
22063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22070 table style listed in the style selection.
22073 \begin_layout Standard
22075 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22076 Other available styles include:
22079 \begin_layout Itemize
22081 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22090 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22094 \begin_layout Itemize
22096 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22097 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22100 \begin_layout Itemize
22102 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22111 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22112 bold top/bottom lines (see
22123 \begin_layout Standard
22125 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22126 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22127 button can be changed in
22129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22130 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22134 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22138 \begin_layout Subsection
22142 \begin_layout Standard
22143 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22146 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22150 This brings up the table dialog.
22151 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22152 cursor is placed currently.
22153 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22154 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22155 done on all of your selection.
22158 \begin_layout Standard
22159 In addition to the table dialog, the
22162 \begin_inset space ~
22167 helps you in setting table properties.
22168 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22171 \begin_layout Standard
22175 \begin_inset space ~
22180 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22181 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22182 current cell respectively.
22183 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22185 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22186 of text, see section
22187 \begin_inset space ~
22191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22193 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22200 \begin_layout Standard
22201 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22202 using the check box
22211 This will merge the cells to
22215 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22216 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22217 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22218 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22219 in the last row without the upper border:
22222 \begin_layout Standard
22224 \begin_inset Tabular
22225 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22226 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22227 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22228 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22229 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22230 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22250 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22361 \begin_layout Standard
22362 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22363 -arguments for the table.
22364 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22365 explained in the chapter
22372 \begin_inset space ~
22378 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22379 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22380 but are visible in the output.
22383 \begin_layout Standard
22384 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 Most DVI-viewers are
22396 able to display rotations.
22404 \begin_layout Standard
22409 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22414 adds lines for all cell borders.
22417 \begin_layout Subsection
22419 \begin_inset Index idx
22422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22423 Tables ! Multi-page
22429 \begin_inset Index idx
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 \begin_layout Standard
22442 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22445 \begin_inset space ~
22449 \begin_inset space ~
22457 \begin_inset space ~
22462 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22463 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22466 \begin_layout Description
22471 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22472 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22473 Except for the first page, if
22476 \begin_inset space ~
22484 \begin_layout Description
22488 \begin_inset space ~
22493 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22494 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22497 \begin_layout Description
22502 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22503 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22504 except for the last page, if
22507 \begin_inset space ~
22515 \begin_layout Description
22519 \begin_inset space ~
22524 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22525 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22528 \begin_layout Description
22529 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22530 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22536 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22539 \begin_inset space ~
22547 \begin_layout Standard
22548 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22549 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22550 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22556 In this context, first means first in this order:
22559 \begin_inset space ~
22571 \begin_inset space ~
22576 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22579 \begin_layout Standard
22581 \begin_inset Tabular
22582 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22583 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22584 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22585 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22586 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22587 <row endfirsthead="true">
22588 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22599 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 <row endfirsthead="true">
22619 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22630 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22651 <row endhead="true">
22652 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22682 <row endhead="true">
22683 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22715 <row endfoot="true">
22716 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24140 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24357 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24419 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24450 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24512 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24574 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24697 <row endlastfoot="true">
24698 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24709 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24718 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24735 \begin_layout Subsection
24737 \begin_inset Index idx
24740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24749 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24756 \begin_layout Standard
24757 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24758 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24759 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24760 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24764 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24767 \begin_layout Standard
24768 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24769 for the column in the table dialog.
24770 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24771 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24775 \begin_layout Standard
24777 \begin_inset Tabular
24778 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24779 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24780 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24781 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24782 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24802 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24871 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24927 This is longer now.
24932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24984 This is longer now.
24989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25015 \begin_layout Standard
25016 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25017 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25022 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25023 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25028 Selection with the mouse or with
25032 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25033 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25034 the selection from outside the table.
25037 \begin_layout Section
25039 \begin_inset Index idx
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25058 \begin_layout Subsection
25062 \begin_layout Standard
25063 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25064 have a fixed location.
25066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25073 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25081 \begin_inset space ~
25086 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25087 too many notes on the current page.
25090 \begin_layout Standard
25091 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25092 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25093 and pages without text.
25094 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25095 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25096 Floats are therefore numbered.
25097 Referencing is described in section
25098 \begin_inset space ~
25102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25104 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25111 \begin_layout Standard
25112 To insert a float, use the menu
25114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25118 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25119 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25121 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25122 \begin_inset Index idx
25125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25132 paragraph within the float.
25133 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25134 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25135 left-clicking on the box label.
25136 A closed float box looks like this:
25137 \begin_inset Graphics
25138 filename clipart/float.png
25143 – a gray button with a red label.
25146 \begin_layout Standard
25147 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25149 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25152 \begin_layout Subsection
25154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25156 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25161 \begin_inset Index idx
25164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25165 Floats ! Figure floats
25173 \begin_layout Standard
25175 \begin_inset space ~
25179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25181 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25185 was created using the menu
25187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25188 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25194 arg "float-insert figure"
25198 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25207 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25211 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25212 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25214 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25216 \begin_inset space ~
25224 arg "layout-paragraph"
25230 \begin_layout Standard
25231 \begin_inset Float figure
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 \begin_inset Graphics
25241 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25256 name "fig:A-star-in"
25273 \begin_layout Standard
25274 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25275 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25286 ) and refer to it using the menu
25288 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25294 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25298 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25299 vague references like
25300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25307 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25308 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25318 For more about cross-references, see section
25319 \begin_inset space ~
25323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25325 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25332 \begin_layout Standard
25333 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25334 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25335 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25336 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25337 as described in section
25338 \begin_inset space ~
25342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25344 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25350 \begin_inset space ~
25354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25356 reference "fig:Two-images"
25360 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25361 You can also set the images one below the other.
25363 \begin_inset space ~
25367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25369 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25376 reference "fig:Star"
25380 are the subfigures.
25383 \begin_layout Standard
25384 \begin_inset Float figure
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25396 \begin_inset Float figure
25403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25404 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25409 name "fig:Undefinable"
25421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25422 \begin_inset Graphics
25423 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25435 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25439 \begin_inset Float figure
25446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25465 \begin_inset Graphics
25466 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25478 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25485 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25490 name "fig:Two-images"
25507 \begin_layout Subsection
25509 \begin_inset Index idx
25512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25513 Floats ! Table floats
25521 \begin_layout Standard
25522 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25525 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25528 or the toolbar button
25531 arg "float-insert table"
25535 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25536 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25537 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25539 \begin_inset space ~
25543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25545 reference "tab:Table-float"
25552 \begin_layout Standard
25553 \begin_inset Float table
25560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25561 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25566 name "tab:Table-float"
25578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25580 \begin_inset Tabular
25581 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25582 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25583 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25584 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25585 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25712 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25733 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25736 \end{array}\right]$
25744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25757 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25778 \begin_layout Subsection
25780 \begin_inset Index idx
25783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25792 \begin_layout Standard
25794 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25795 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25796 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25798 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25806 \begin_inset space ~
25814 \begin_layout Section
25816 \begin_inset Index idx
25819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25828 \begin_layout Standard
25830 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25832 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25833 \begin_inset space \space{}
25839 \begin_layout Standard
25840 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25841 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25847 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25848 and its alignment within the page.
25851 \begin_layout Standard
25853 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25863 height_special "totalheight"
25868 backgroundcolor "none"
25871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25874 This is a minipage.
25875 The text is set in an italic style.
25878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25881 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25882 another formatting.
25890 \begin_layout Standard
25891 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25894 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25898 as described in section
25899 \begin_inset space ~
25903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25905 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25910 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25916 \begin_layout Standard
25917 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25927 height_special "totalheight"
25932 backgroundcolor "none"
25935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25936 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25937 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25943 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25947 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25957 height_special "totalheight"
25962 backgroundcolor "none"
25965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25966 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25967 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25975 \begin_layout Standard
25976 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25982 \begin_layout Standard
25983 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25985 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25992 \begin_inset space ~
26000 \begin_layout Chapter
26001 Mathematical Formulas
26002 \begin_inset Index idx
26005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26012 \begin_inset Index idx
26015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26046 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26053 \begin_layout Standard
26054 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26059 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26062 \begin_layout Section
26064 \begin_inset Index idx
26067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26076 \begin_layout Standard
26077 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26090 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26092 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26093 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26094 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26102 \begin_layout Standard
26103 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26107 \begin_inset space ~
26112 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26115 \begin_layout Standard
26116 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26117 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26120 \begin_layout Standard
26121 This is a line with an inline formula
26122 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26128 \begin_layout Standard
26129 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26130 paragraph, like this one:
26131 \begin_inset Formula
26138 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26141 \begin_layout Standard
26143 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26145 For example, typing
26146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26159 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26160 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26164 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26167 \begin_inset space ~
26175 \begin_layout Subsection
26176 Navigating in Formulas
26177 \begin_inset Index idx
26180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26189 \begin_layout Standard
26190 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26191 achieved with the arrow keys.
26193 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26194 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26199 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26200 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26204 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26208 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26211 \end{array}\right]$
26219 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26224 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26225 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26228 \begin_layout Standard
26233 , printed in this document as
26234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26238 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26245 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26246 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26247 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26252 For example, if you want
26253 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26261 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26271 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26275 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26280 , since in the latter case only the
26283 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26288 will be under the square root sign:
26289 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26295 \begin_layout Standard
26296 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26298 \begin_inset Formula
26300 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26309 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26310 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26313 \begin_layout Subsection
26317 \begin_layout Standard
26318 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26319 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26323 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26324 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26325 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26326 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26327 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26331 \begin_layout Subsection
26332 Exponents and Subscripts
26333 \begin_inset Index idx
26336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26343 \begin_inset Index idx
26346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26355 \begin_layout Standard
26356 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26359 arg "math-superscript"
26365 arg "math-subscript"
26368 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26370 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26373 , type in a formula
26376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26386 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26392 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26396 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26402 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26408 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26417 , you have to use an extra
26421 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26422 For example, if you want
26423 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26429 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26435 Subscripts are similar: To get
26436 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26442 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26450 \begin_layout Subsection
26452 \begin_inset Index idx
26455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26464 \begin_layout Standard
26465 Create a fraction either with the command
26471 or by using the icon
26474 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26480 \begin_inset space ~
26486 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26487 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26488 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26493 To move back up, press
26498 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26499 \begin_inset Formula
26501 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26504 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26512 \begin_layout Subsection
26514 \begin_inset Index idx
26517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26526 \begin_layout Standard
26527 Roots can be created using the
26530 \begin_inset space ~
26538 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26544 arg "math-insert \\root"
26566 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26572 always produces a square root.
26575 \begin_layout Subsection
26576 Operators with Limits
26577 \begin_inset Index idx
26580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26587 \begin_inset Index idx
26590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26599 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26606 \begin_layout Standard
26608 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26612 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26615 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26616 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26617 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26618 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26619 The sum operator will automatically place its
26620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26627 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26629 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26633 \begin_inset Formula
26635 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26640 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26644 \begin_layout Standard
26645 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26647 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26648 behind the operator and using the menu
26650 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26651 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26653 \begin_inset space ~
26657 \begin_inset space ~
26671 \begin_layout Standard
26672 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26681 \begin_inset Index idx
26684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26691 \begin_inset Formula
26693 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26698 which will place the
26699 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26711 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26712 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26718 \begin_layout Standard
26719 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26726 Have a look at section
26727 \begin_inset space ~
26731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26733 reference "subsec:Functions"
26737 for an explanation of function macros.
26740 \begin_layout Subsection
26742 \begin_inset Index idx
26745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26754 \begin_layout Standard
26755 Most math symbols can be found in the
26758 \begin_inset space ~
26763 under one of several categories; including
26780 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26784 \begin_layout Standard
26785 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26786 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26787 don't have to use the
26790 \begin_inset space ~
26795 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26797 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26800 \begin_layout Subsection
26802 \begin_inset Index idx
26805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26814 \begin_layout Standard
26815 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26821 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26827 \begin_inset space ~
26835 arg "math-insert \\space"
26839 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26840 For example, the sequence
26845 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26848 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26850 \begin_inset Graphics
26851 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26856 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26857 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26858 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26859 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26860 , because they are negative
26862 Here are two examples:
26865 \begin_layout Standard
26875 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26881 \begin_layout Standard
26891 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26897 \begin_layout Subsection
26899 \begin_inset Index idx
26902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26911 name "subsec:Functions"
26918 \begin_layout Standard
26922 \begin_inset space ~
26927 contains under the button
26930 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26933 a number of function macros, such as
26934 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26938 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26946 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26953 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26954 avoid confusions, because
26955 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26959 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26965 \begin_layout Standard
26966 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26968 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26972 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26979 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26980 are placed, as described in section
26981 \begin_inset space ~
26985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26987 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26994 \begin_layout Subsection
26996 \begin_inset Index idx
26999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27008 \begin_layout Standard
27009 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27011 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27012 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27013 commands, for example, to enter
27014 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27017 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27018 Our example is entered by typing
27023 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27030 \begin_inset space ~
27034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27036 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27040 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27044 \begin_inset Float table
27051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27052 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27057 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27061 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27071 \begin_inset Tabular
27072 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27073 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27160 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27214 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27268 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27376 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27430 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27484 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27538 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27592 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27637 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27658 \begin_layout Standard
27659 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27662 \begin_inset space ~
27670 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27673 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27677 \begin_layout Section
27678 Brackets and Delimiters
27679 \begin_inset Index idx
27682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27689 \begin_inset Index idx
27692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27701 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27708 \begin_layout Standard
27709 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27711 For some purposes, using just the keys
27716 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27717 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27718 toolbar delimiter icon
27721 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27725 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27726 \begin_inset Formula
27728 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27736 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27737 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27741 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27744 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27750 \begin_inset Formula
27752 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27760 \begin_layout Standard
27761 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27762 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27766 \begin_layout Standard
27767 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27768 left side and right side.
27769 If you use the option
27772 \begin_inset space ~
27777 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27778 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27780 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27785 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27786 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27789 \begin_layout Standard
27790 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27791 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27792 is to go inside the brackets.
27793 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27798 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27799 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27800 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27804 arg "math-delim ( )"
27810 \begin_layout Section
27811 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27812 \begin_inset Index idx
27815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27822 \begin_inset Index idx
27825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27832 \begin_inset Index idx
27835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27836 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27844 \begin_layout Standard
27845 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27849 \begin_inset space ~
27857 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27861 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27862 Here is an example:
27863 \begin_inset Formula
27865 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27874 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27875 \begin_inset space ~
27879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27881 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27886 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27887 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27888 This alignment is set in the box
27893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27942 for every column as default.
27943 For example, the sequence
27944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27955 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27956 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27957 corresponds to the relevant column.
27958 The result will look like this:
27959 \begin_inset Formula
27962 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27963 column & has & has\,right\\
27964 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27973 \begin_layout Standard
27974 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27977 arg "newline-insert newline"
27980 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27981 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27983 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27986 or the math toolbar.
27989 \begin_layout Standard
27990 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27991 It can be created with the menu
27993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27994 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27996 \begin_inset space ~
28008 Here is an example:
28009 \begin_inset Formula
28023 \begin_layout Standard
28024 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28027 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28030 arg "newline-insert newline"
28034 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28039 arg "newline-insert newline"
28042 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28050 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28051 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28052 A new row is created by every further entry of
28055 arg "newline-insert newline"
28059 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28060 Here is an example:
28061 \begin_inset Formula
28063 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28064 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28069 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28070 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28071 \begin_inset Formula
28073 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28081 \begin_layout Standard
28082 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28089 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28090 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28093 reference "eq:asquared"
28098 The other types are described in section
28099 \begin_inset space ~
28103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28105 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28112 \begin_layout Section
28113 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28114 \begin_inset Index idx
28117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28118 Math ! Formula numbering
28124 \begin_inset Index idx
28127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28128 Math ! Referencing formulas
28134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28136 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28143 \begin_layout Standard
28144 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28146 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28147 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28149 \begin_inset space ~
28153 \begin_inset space ~
28161 arg "math-number-toggle"
28165 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28166 within parentheses.
28167 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28168 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28169 the document class.
28170 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28171 separated by a dot:
28172 \begin_inset Formula
28182 arg "math-number-toggle"
28185 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28186 You can only number displayed formulas.
28189 \begin_layout Standard
28190 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28192 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28193 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28195 \begin_inset space ~
28199 \begin_inset space ~
28207 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28210 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28211 \begin_inset Formula
28214 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28220 To number all lines use the shortcut
28223 arg "math-number-toggle"
28229 \begin_layout Standard
28230 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28233 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28234 A label is inserted with the menu
28236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28245 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28246 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28247 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28259 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28260 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28261 We inserted in the following example the label
28262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28269 in the second line:
28270 \begin_inset Formula
28272 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28273 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28278 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28279 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28280 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28282 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28284 \begin_inset space ~
28292 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28296 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28297 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28298 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28299 as the formula number:
28302 \begin_layout Standard
28303 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28306 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28314 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28315 's cross-reference box are described in section
28316 \begin_inset space ~
28320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28322 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28327 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28335 \begin_layout Section
28336 User defined math macros
28337 \begin_inset Index idx
28340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28349 \begin_layout Standard
28351 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28352 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28353 Math macros are explained in section
28356 \begin_inset space ~
28368 \begin_layout Section
28372 \begin_layout Subsection
28374 \begin_inset Index idx
28377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28386 \begin_layout Standard
28387 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28388 To set a font in a formula, use the
28391 \begin_inset space ~
28399 arg "math-insert \\font"
28402 , or enter its command, listed in table
28403 \begin_inset space ~
28407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28409 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28417 \begin_inset Float table
28424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28425 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28430 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28434 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28444 \begin_inset Tabular
28445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28446 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28448 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28480 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28507 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28534 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28567 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28594 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28616 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28622 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28623 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28636 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28652 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28686 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28708 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28714 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28722 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28735 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28751 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28785 \begin_layout Standard
28786 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28794 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28797 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28799 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28803 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28822 \begin_layout Standard
28823 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28824 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28829 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28830 space when you need a space in the box.
28831 Here is an example where
28832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28843 denotes the set of numbers:
28844 \begin_inset Formula
28846 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28854 \begin_layout Standard
28855 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28856 You can, for example, put a character in
28865 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28869 \begin_inset Newline newline
28872 So it is better not to use this feature.
28875 \begin_layout Standard
28876 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28877 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28881 \begin_inset Newline newline
28884 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28890 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28891 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28897 \begin_layout Standard
28904 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28907 \begin_layout Standard
28908 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28910 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28911 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28913 \begin_inset space ~
28921 \begin_layout Subsection
28923 \begin_inset Index idx
28926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28935 \begin_layout Standard
28936 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28938 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28942 \begin_inset space ~
28946 \begin_inset space ~
28954 \begin_inset space ~
28962 arg "math-insert \\font"
28966 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28967 in black instead of blue.
28968 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28969 Here is an example:
28970 \begin_inset Formula
28973 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28974 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28983 \begin_layout Subsection
28985 \begin_inset Index idx
28988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28997 \begin_layout Standard
28998 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28999 automatically chosen in most situations.
29017 For most characters,
29025 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29026 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29031 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29032 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29033 thinks are appropriate.
29034 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29037 arg "math-insert \\style"
29041 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29042 For example, you can set
29043 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29046 , which is normally in
29055 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29059 The four styles are used in the following example:
29062 \begin_layout Standard
29063 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29067 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29071 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29075 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29081 \begin_layout Standard
29082 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29083 is set in a particular size with the menu
29085 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29087 \begin_inset space ~
29092 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29093 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29094 will be adjusted to correspond.
29095 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29106 \begin_layout Standard
29110 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29116 \begin_layout Section
29117 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29119 \begin_inset Index idx
29122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29129 \begin_inset Index idx
29132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29141 \begin_layout Standard
29143 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29144 that are in common use.
29147 \begin_layout Subsection
29148 Enabling AMS-Support
29151 \begin_layout Standard
29152 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29153 the document by selecting the checkbox
29156 \begin_inset space ~
29160 \begin_inset space ~
29164 \begin_inset space ~
29171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29175 \begin_inset Index idx
29178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29179 Document ! Settings
29187 \begin_inset space ~
29193 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29194 -errors in formulas,
29195 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29198 \begin_layout Subsection
29200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29202 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29207 \begin_inset Index idx
29210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29211 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29219 \begin_layout Standard
29220 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29221 provides a selection of different formula types.
29223 allows you to choose between
29244 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29245 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29252 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29255 \begin_layout Chapter
29259 \begin_layout Section
29261 \begin_inset Index idx
29264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29273 name "sec:Cross-References"
29280 \begin_layout Standard
29281 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29282 's strengths is cross-references.
29283 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29285 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29286 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29287 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29290 \begin_layout Enumerate
29294 \begin_layout Enumerate
29295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29297 name "enu:Second-item"
29304 \begin_layout Enumerate
29308 \begin_layout Standard
29309 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29314 or by pressing the toolbar button
29321 A gray label box like this:
29322 \begin_inset Graphics
29323 filename clipart/label.png
29327 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29329 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29364 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29365 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29381 \begin_layout Standard
29382 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29384 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29387 or the toolbar button
29390 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29394 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29395 \begin_inset Graphics
29396 filename clipart/reference.png
29400 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29402 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29415 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29419 \begin_layout Standard
29420 As an alternative to
29422 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29425 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29430 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29431 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29445 \begin_layout Standard
29446 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29447 \begin_inset space ~
29451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29453 reference "enu:Second-item"
29460 \begin_layout Standard
29461 It is recommended to use a protected space
29465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29466 described in section
29467 \begin_inset space ~
29471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29473 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29482 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29483 line breaks between them.
29486 \begin_layout Standard
29487 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29490 \begin_layout Description
29491 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29494 reference "fig:Two-images"
29501 \begin_layout Description
29502 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29503 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29515 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29522 \begin_layout Description
29523 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29524 \begin_inset space ~
29528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29529 LatexCommand pageref
29530 reference "fig:Two-images"
29537 \begin_layout Description
29539 \begin_inset space ~
29543 \begin_inset space ~
29546 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29548 LatexCommand vpageref
29549 reference "fig:Two-images"
29554 \begin_inset Newline newline
29557 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29558 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29559 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29560 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29561 it prints “on the next page”.
29562 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29565 \begin_layout Description
29567 \begin_inset space ~
29571 \begin_inset space ~
29575 \begin_inset space ~
29578 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29581 reference "fig:Two-images"
29586 \begin_inset Newline newline
29589 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29595 ; otherwise it behaves like
29599 \begin_inset space ~
29603 \begin_inset space ~
29612 \begin_layout Description
29614 \begin_inset space ~
29617 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29618 \begin_inset Newline newline
29622 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29630 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29640 \begin_inset Index idx
29643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29645 packages ! prettyref
29651 \begin_inset Index idx
29654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29656 packages ! refstyle
29667 \begin_inset Newline newline
29670 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29671 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29674 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29678 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29679 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29687 is the default and preferred because
29691 supports only English documents.
29692 The format is specified by using the command
29704 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29705 preamble of the document.
29706 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29724 \begin_inset Newline newline
29731 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29736 \begin_inset Newline newline
29747 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29748 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29750 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29751 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29756 , you might do so as follows:
29757 \begin_inset Newline newline
29764 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29769 \begin_inset Newline newline
29772 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29773 the package documentation
29774 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29776 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29782 \begin_inset Newline newline
29793 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29800 \begin_layout Description
29802 \begin_inset space ~
29805 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29807 LatexCommand nameref
29808 reference "fig:Two-images"
29815 \begin_layout Description
29817 \begin_inset space ~
29820 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29821 label for the reference:
29822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29823 LatexCommand labelonly
29824 reference "fig:Two-images"
29829 \begin_inset Newline newline
29832 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29833 Code, if you want to issue a command
29834 that \SpecialChar LyX
29840 , then you may want to use the
29843 \begin_inset space ~
29848 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29858 This is the form needed for e.
29859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29863 \begin_inset space \space{}
29870 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29871 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29873 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29877 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29881 \begin_layout Standard
29882 You can only use the style
29886 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29890 is always possible.
29893 \begin_layout Standard
29894 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29895 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29897 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29898 \begin_inset space ~
29902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29904 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29911 \begin_layout Standard
29912 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29916 \begin_inset space ~
29920 \begin_inset space ~
29925 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29926 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29929 \begin_inset space ~
29934 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29935 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29938 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29944 \begin_layout Standard
29945 You can change labels at any time.
29946 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29947 do not need to think about this.
29950 \begin_layout Standard
29951 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29953 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29957 \begin_layout Standard
29958 References are described in detail in the section
29959 \begin_inset space ~
29969 \begin_inset space ~
29977 \begin_layout Section
29978 Table of Contents and other Listings
29979 \begin_inset Index idx
29982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29989 \begin_inset Index idx
29992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29993 Navigating ! Outline
29999 \begin_inset Index idx
30002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30018 \begin_layout Subsection
30020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30022 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30029 \begin_layout Standard
30030 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30032 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30033 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30035 \begin_inset space ~
30039 \begin_inset space ~
30045 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30047 If you click on it, the
30051 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30052 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30053 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30055 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30057 \begin_inset space ~
30062 that is described in section
30063 \begin_inset space ~
30067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30069 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30076 \begin_layout Standard
30077 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30078 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30080 \begin_inset space ~
30084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30086 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30090 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30092 \begin_inset space ~
30096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30098 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30102 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30104 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30107 \begin_layout Subsection
30108 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30111 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30118 \begin_layout Standard
30119 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30121 You can insert them via the
30123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30124 List/Contents/References
30127 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30130 \begin_layout Section
30131 URLs and Hyperlinks
30132 \begin_inset Index idx
30135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30142 \begin_inset Index idx
30145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30154 \begin_layout Subsection
30156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30165 \begin_layout Standard
30166 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30174 \begin_layout Standard
30175 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30177 \begin_inset Flex URL
30180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30182 https://www.lyx.org
30190 \begin_layout Standard
30191 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30197 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30201 \begin_layout Standard
30202 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30210 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30219 \begin_layout Subsection
30221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30223 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30230 \begin_layout Standard
30231 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30236 or with the toolbar button
30243 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30252 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30253 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30256 name "LyX's homepage"
30257 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30262 , an Email address like this:
30263 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30265 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30266 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30272 , or a link to a file.
30277 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30285 \begin_layout Standard
30286 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30299 to the link target.
30302 \begin_layout Standard
30303 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30304 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30305 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30306 the text style dialog.
30307 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30311 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30313 name "LyX's homepage"
30314 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30322 \begin_layout Standard
30323 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30327 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30330 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30334 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30336 \begin_inset Newline newline
30344 \begin_inset Newline newline
30351 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30352 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30356 \begin_layout Section
30358 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30360 \begin_inset Index idx
30363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30372 name "sec:Counters"
30379 \begin_layout Standard
30381 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30382 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30383 is its ability to manage counters.
30384 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30385 modify counters directly.
30386 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30388 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30389 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30390 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30391 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30392 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30396 \begin_layout Standard
30398 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30399 There are five commands you can use:
30402 \begin_layout Enumerate
30404 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30405 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30408 \begin_layout Enumerate
30410 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30411 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30412 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30415 \begin_layout Enumerate
30417 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30418 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30421 \begin_layout Enumerate
30423 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30424 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30428 \begin_layout Enumerate
30430 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30431 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30434 \begin_layout Standard
30436 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30437 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30438 those that are available in the current document class.
30443 \begin_layout Section
30445 \begin_inset Index idx
30448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30457 name "sec:Appendices"
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30465 Appendices are created with the menu
30467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30469 \begin_inset space ~
30473 \begin_inset space ~
30479 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30480 as the appendix part of the book.
30481 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30484 \begin_layout Standard
30485 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30486 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30487 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30488 and the subsection number.
30489 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30493 \begin_layout Standard
30495 \begin_inset space ~
30499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30501 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30509 \begin_inset space ~
30513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30515 reference "subsec:Export"
30522 \begin_layout Section
30524 \begin_inset Index idx
30527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30536 name "sec:Bibliography"
30543 \begin_layout Standard
30544 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30546 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30547 \begin_inset space ~
30551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30553 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30560 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30565 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30566 \begin_inset space ~
30570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30572 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30577 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30578 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30579 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30583 using a bibliography database.
30586 \begin_layout Standard
30587 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30588 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30592 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30593 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30594 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30595 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30596 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30599 \begin_layout Subsection
30600 The Bibliography Environment
30601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30603 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30610 \begin_layout Standard
30615 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30617 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30626 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30628 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30629 of ASCII characters only.
30633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30635 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30638 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30644 \begin_inset Newline newline
30648 \begin_inset Flex URL
30651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30653 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30663 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30673 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30674 \begin_inset Newline newline
30681 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30682 the number of the entry.
30687 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30696 \begin_layout Standard
30697 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30702 or the toolbar button
30705 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30709 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30710 containing the available citations.
30711 Select one or more keys from the list and
30721 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30722 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30726 \begin_layout Standard
30727 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30728 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30729 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30741 \begin_layout Standard
30745 Companion Second Edition
30748 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30750 key "latexcompanion"
30758 \begin_layout Standard
30759 The \SpecialChar LyX
30760 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30761 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30771 \begin_layout Standard
30772 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30779 \begin_inset Index idx
30782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30791 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30792 the label needs to be given the form
30793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30804 Author A and Author B(Year)
30805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30812 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30819 \begin_inset space ~
30824 in the document settings
30825 \begin_inset Index idx
30828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30829 Document ! Settings
30836 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30838 \begin_inset space ~
30844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30846 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30854 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30856 Once you have done that, the
30860 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30877 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30878 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30879 These two are madatory.
30880 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30883 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30885 ) and in abrreviated form (
30892 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30893 add the abbreviated form to
30897 and the full list to the optional
30905 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30906 If specified like this,
30908 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30909 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30912 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30919 is specified, toggling
30920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30927 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30928 full and abbreviated list
30932 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30933 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30934 the citation references.
30935 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30940 \begin_layout Standard
30941 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30944 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30946 \begin_inset space ~
30954 arg "layout-paragraph"
30958 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30961 \begin_layout Subsection
30962 Bibliography databases
30963 \begin_inset Index idx
30966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30967 Bibliography ! Databases
30973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30975 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30982 \begin_layout Standard
30983 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30989 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30991 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30992 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30997 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30999 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31000 your working field in a database.
31001 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31002 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31003 list for that document.
31004 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31008 \begin_layout Standard
31009 The database is a text file with the file extension
31010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31021 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31022 The format is explained in
31023 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31030 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31032 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31034 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31040 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31041 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31042 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31044 \begin_inset Flex URL
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31049 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31057 \begin_layout Standard
31059 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31060 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31061 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31063 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31065 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31066 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31067 Those are addressed by
31072 \begin_inset Index idx
31075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31077 packages ! biblatex
31083 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31084 (although it has been significantly
31085 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31095 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31096 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31097 might conversely fail to correctly
31098 handle databases that use specific
31107 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31111 \begin_layout Standard
31112 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31117 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31119 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31123 \begin_inset Index idx
31126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31127 Document ! Settings
31139 \begin_inset space ~
31144 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31152 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31153 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31155 \begin_inset Index idx
31158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31159 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31168 \begin_layout Standard
31169 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31173 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31175 \begin_inset space ~
31181 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31182 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31190 Add bibliography to TOC
31192 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31197 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31198 in the document or just the cited references.
31200 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31205 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31206 differ from the encoding of the document.
31211 \begin_layout Standard
31212 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31213 style file is a text file with the file extension
31214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31225 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31226 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31227 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31228 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31230 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31236 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31237 \begin_inset Newline newline
31241 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31243 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31253 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31258 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31262 \begin_layout Standard
31263 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31266 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31268 \begin_inset Index idx
31271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31272 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31278 \begin_inset Index idx
31281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31283 packages ! biblatex
31291 \begin_layout Standard
31292 Accessing a database via
31296 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31300 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31302 \begin_inset space ~
31308 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31309 you cannot select a
31314 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31318 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31321 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31322 As for the styles, note the following.
31327 \begin_layout Standard
31332 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31345 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31346 file (text file with the file extension
31347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31358 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31359 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31361 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31365 \begin_layout Standard
31370 styles are not set in the
31373 \begin_inset space ~
31378 dialog, but in the document settings.
31379 \begin_inset Index idx
31382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31383 Document ! Settings
31388 However, in the dialog in the
31392 field, which is only visible if you use
31396 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31397 example how its heading will appear).
31398 These options are described in detail in the
31403 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31414 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31415 \begin_inset space ~
31419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31421 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31432 Bibliography Processors
31435 \begin_layout Standard
31436 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31437 uses a bibliography processor,
31438 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31439 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31440 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31442 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31443 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31446 \begin_layout Standard
31447 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31449 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31450 You can do this on a general level in
31452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31453 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31454 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31457 or for individual documents in
31459 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31460 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31464 The following variants are available by default:
31467 \begin_layout Description
31468 biber a specific, modern processor
31469 \begin_inset Index idx
31472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31479 developed exclusively for
31483 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31489 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31494 makes use of; if you use the
31498 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31505 \begin_layout Description
31506 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31507 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31508 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31512 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31515 \begin_layout Description
31516 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31517 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31521 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31525 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31529 features are supported.
31532 \begin_layout Standard
31533 By default (with the
31539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31540 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31553 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31554 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31555 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31558 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31559 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31572 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31573 -based bibliography styles).
31574 This should suit most needs.
31577 \begin_layout Standard
31578 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31579 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31580 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31585 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31586 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31587 You can adjust it in
31589 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31590 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31591 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31597 \begin_layout Standard
31598 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31599 can add below the selection.
31600 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31601 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31617 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31621 \begin_layout Standard
31623 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31625 These are explained in detail in section
31627 Customizing Bibliographies
31631 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31636 Additional Features
31639 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31643 \begin_layout Subsection
31645 \begin_inset Index idx
31648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31649 Bibliography ! Citation format
31655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31657 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31664 \begin_layout Standard
31665 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31670 \begin_inset space \space{}
31673 numerical citation (as
31674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31681 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31689 ) or author-year citations (as
31690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31699 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31703 \begin_layout Standard
31704 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31707 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31708 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31712 \begin_inset Index idx
31715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31716 Document ! Settings
31721 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31727 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31728 labels, is there to use
31731 \begin_inset space ~
31742 \begin_inset space ~
31747 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31750 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31757 \begin_layout Standard
31758 With a bibliography database (see
31759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31761 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31768 ) one has in contrary to the
31772 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31773 These style formats are available:
31776 \begin_layout Description
31778 \begin_inset space ~
31781 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31782 -based approached without any additional packages
31783 (simple numeric citations).
31786 \begin_layout Description
31787 Biblatex loads the package
31792 \begin_inset Index idx
31795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31797 packages ! biblatex
31802 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31804 Biblatex citation style
31808 Biblatex bibliography style
31811 Options to the package
31815 can be entered in the
31822 \begin_layout Description
31824 \begin_inset space ~
31828 \begin_inset space ~
31831 mode) loads the package
31835 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31836 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31848 behavior very closely.
31853 this option has some additional styles.
31858 styles are also supported by this variant.
31861 \begin_layout Description
31863 \begin_inset space ~
31866 (BibTeX) loads the package
31871 \begin_inset Index idx
31874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31881 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31884 \begin_layout Description
31886 \begin_inset space ~
31889 (BibTeX) loads the package
31894 \begin_inset Index idx
31897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31904 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31907 \begin_layout Standard
31916 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31918 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31927 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31929 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31930 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31932 Biblatex citation style
31935 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31941 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31945 \begin_layout Standard
31946 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31947 are available in the
31952 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31953 a name prefix such as
31954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31969 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31974 \begin_inset space \space{}
31978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31989 \begin_layout Standard
31990 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31996 \begin_inset space \space{}
31999 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32005 \begin_inset space \space{}
32009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32021 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32025 \begin_inset space ~
32033 \begin_inset space ~
32039 Here is a simple example where the text
32040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32044 \begin_inset space ~
32048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32051 appears after the reference:
32054 \begin_layout Quote
32056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32059 key "latexcompanion"
32067 \begin_layout Standard
32068 All styles except for
32072 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32082 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32086 \begin_layout Standard
32087 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32088 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32089 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32094 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32095 multi-citation (so-called
32096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32099 qualified citation lists
32100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32106 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32111 dialog will display three columns in the field
32118 \begin_inset space ~
32126 \begin_inset space ~
32134 \begin_inset space ~
32140 If you double-click on an item's
32143 \begin_inset space ~
32151 \begin_inset space ~
32156 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32159 General text before
32165 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32168 \begin_layout Subsection
32170 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32173 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32177 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32181 \begin_layout Standard
32183 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32185 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32188 \begin_inset space ~
32192 \begin_inset space ~
32196 \begin_inset space ~
32200 \begin_inset space ~
32203 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32206 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32209 \begin_layout Itemize
32211 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32212 If citation entries include any of the fields
32213 \begin_inset Flex Code
32216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32218 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32227 \begin_inset Flex Code
32230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32232 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32240 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32241 \begin_inset Flex Code
32244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32246 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32254 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32255 \begin_inset Flex Code
32258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32260 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32268 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32271 \begin_layout Itemize
32273 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32274 If citation entries include any of the fields
32275 \begin_inset Flex Code
32278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32280 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32288 (filled by JabRef) or
32289 \begin_inset Flex Code
32292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32294 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32302 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32303 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32304 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32307 \begin_layout Standard
32309 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32310 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32311 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32314 Search drive for cited files
32318 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32319 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32320 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32321 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32325 It uses the tokens supplied at
32329 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32330 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32331 arbitrary position).
32333 opens the first matching file it finds.
32334 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32335 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32336 the chance this works for you.
32341 \begin_layout Standard
32343 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32344 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32345 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32347 \begin_inset Flex Code
32350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32352 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32361 \begin_inset Flex Code
32364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32366 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32374 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32378 Cite format description
32385 \begin_layout Section
32387 \begin_inset Index idx
32390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32406 \begin_layout Standard
32407 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32411 \begin_inset space ~
32416 or the toolbar button
32423 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32424 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32425 by \SpecialChar LyX
32426 as the index entry.
32429 \begin_layout Standard
32430 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32433 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32435 \begin_inset space ~
32441 A light blue box labeled
32442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32453 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32454 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32458 \begin_layout Standard
32459 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32460 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32461 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32462 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32464 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32466 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32474 \begin_layout Subsection
32475 Grouping Index Entries
32476 \begin_inset Index idx
32479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32488 \begin_layout Standard
32489 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32491 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32492 lists under the entry
32493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32501 First we create the entry
32502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32510 \begin_inset space ~
32514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32516 reference "subsec:Lists"
32521 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32522 \begin_inset space ~
32526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32528 reference "sec:Itemize"
32532 , we insert the command
32535 \begin_layout Standard
32541 \begin_layout Standard
32545 \begin_layout Standard
32551 \begin_layout Standard
32552 for the enumerated list in section
32553 \begin_inset space ~
32557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32559 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32566 \begin_layout Standard
32567 The exclamation mark
32568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32575 marks the grouping levels.
32576 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32577 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32578 If we don't have an index entry for
32579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32586 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32589 \begin_layout Subsection
32591 \begin_inset Index idx
32594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32595 Index ! Page ranges
32603 \begin_layout Standard
32604 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32606 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32607 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32608 an index entry in section
32609 \begin_inset space ~
32613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32615 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32622 \begin_layout Standard
32625 Paragraph environments|(
32628 \begin_layout Standard
32629 and another entry at the end of section
32630 \begin_inset space ~
32634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32636 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32643 \begin_layout Standard
32646 Paragraph environments|)
32649 \begin_layout Standard
32651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32674 respectively start and end the index range.
32675 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32676 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32677 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32678 An example is the index entry
32679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32682 Document ! Settings
32683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32689 \begin_layout Subsection
32691 \begin_inset Index idx
32694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32695 Index ! Cross referencing
32703 \begin_layout Standard
32704 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32705 We referred for example in the index entry
32706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32714 \begin_inset space ~
32718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32720 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32724 ) to the index entry
32725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32732 in the same section using the entry
32735 \begin_layout Standard
32738 GIF|see{Image formats}
32741 \begin_layout Standard
32742 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32744 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32745 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32748 \begin_layout Subsection
32750 \begin_inset Index idx
32753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32754 Index ! Entry order
32762 \begin_layout Standard
32763 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32764 follow the rules for the index order.
32765 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32771 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32773 \begin_inset space ~
32777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32779 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32788 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32789 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32814 \begin_inset Index idx
32817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32818 Dummy entries ! maïs
32824 \begin_inset Index idx
32827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32828 Dummy entries ! maître
32834 \begin_inset Index idx
32837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32838 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32843 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32844 maïs, maison, maître.
32845 To achieve this, we use the command
32848 \begin_layout Standard
32851 previous entry@current entry
32854 \begin_layout Standard
32855 In our case we want to have
32856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32871 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32874 \begin_layout Standard
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32881 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32882 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32884 See the next subsection for an example.
32887 \begin_layout Subsection
32889 \begin_inset Index idx
32892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32893 Index ! Entry layout
32901 \begin_layout Standard
32902 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32903 \begin_inset Index idx
32906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32909 This is an italic dummy entry
32914 You can also format the page number using the character
32915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32922 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32923 -command without a backslash.
32924 We can write for example
32927 \begin_layout Standard
32930 italic page number:|textit
32933 \begin_layout Standard
32934 to get the page number in italic.
32935 \begin_inset Index idx
32938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32939 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32944 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32945 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32963 \begin_inset space ~
32969 Have a look at section
32970 \begin_inset space ~
32974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32976 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32980 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32984 \begin_layout Standard
32985 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32993 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32997 to generate the index, see section
32998 \begin_inset space ~
33002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33004 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33013 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33018 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33019 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33022 key "latexcompanion"
33035 \begin_layout Standard
33036 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33038 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33039 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33040 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33041 If so, put the following in the preamble
33044 \begin_layout Standard
33056 \begin_layout Standard
33060 \begin_layout Standard
33066 \begin_layout Standard
33067 in the index entry.
33068 \begin_inset Index idx
33071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33072 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33077 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33078 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33079 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33083 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33084 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33085 a bold font for all index entries.
33086 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33098 documentation for details,
33099 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33101 key "makeindex,xindy"
33109 \begin_layout Subsection
33111 \begin_inset Index idx
33114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33123 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33130 \begin_layout Standard
33131 If the index generation program
33135 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33136 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33140 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33141 distribution, is used.
33145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33150 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33151 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33152 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33153 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33154 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33164 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33166 dialog, see section
33167 \begin_inset space ~
33171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33173 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33178 The available options are listed and explained in
33179 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33181 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33187 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33191 \begin_layout Standard
33192 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33193 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33196 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33197 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33201 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33202 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33205 \begin_layout Subsection
33209 \begin_layout Standard
33210 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33211 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33219 next to the standard index.
33221 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33222 that add this feature.
33229 \begin_inset Index idx
33232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33234 packages ! splitidx
33239 package to generate multiple indexes.
33240 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33246 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33248 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33256 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33257 style, but it also includes
33258 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33259 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33267 \begin_layout Standard
33268 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33269 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33275 and select the option
33277 Use multiple Indexes
33284 already contains the standard index
33285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33293 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33294 also appear as a heading) to the
33298 input field and press the
33303 The new index now also appears in the list.
33304 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33305 label color to the new index.
33308 \begin_layout Standard
33309 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33312 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33313 List/Contents/References
33319 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33320 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33321 are additional features:
33324 \begin_layout Itemize
33325 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33326 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33329 \begin_layout Itemize
33330 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33331 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33336 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33337 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33338 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33339 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33342 \begin_layout Itemize
33347 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33348 code in the name of the index.
33351 \begin_layout Section
33352 Nomenclature/Glossary
33353 \begin_inset Index idx
33356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33363 \begin_inset Index idx
33366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33397 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33404 \begin_layout Standard
33405 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33406 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33407 called nomenclature or glossary.
33410 \begin_layout Standard
33411 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33418 \begin_inset Index idx
33421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33429 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33431 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33438 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33442 \begin_layout Standard
33443 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33444 and then use the menu
33446 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33452 \begin_inset space ~
33457 or the toolbar button
33460 arg "nomencl-insert"
33465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33476 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33479 \begin_layout Standard
33480 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33481 The first is the term or
33485 that you wish to define.
33490 of the term or symbol.
33493 \begin_layout Standard
33494 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33502 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33503 code for nomenclature entries the option
33507 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33515 \begin_layout Subsection
33516 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33517 \begin_inset Index idx
33520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33521 Nomenclature ! Layout
33529 \begin_layout Standard
33530 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33534 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33541 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33549 \begin_inset Newline newline
33557 \begin_inset Newline newline
33563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33570 character starts/ends the formula.
33571 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33572 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33584 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33594 \begin_layout Standard
33595 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33596 syntax is given in section
33597 \begin_inset space ~
33601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33603 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33610 \begin_layout Standard
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33619 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33621 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33626 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33633 in this document is:
33634 \begin_inset Newline newline
33639 dummy entry for the character
33644 \begin_inset Newline newline
33656 \begin_inset space ~
33666 font use the command
33695 \begin_layout Standard
33696 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33701 \begin_inset space \space{}
33705 \begin_inset Newline newline
33721 \begin_inset Newline newline
33724 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33725 This command will make the font of all symbols
33732 \begin_inset space ~
33740 \begin_layout Standard
33741 If the characters |
33742 \begin_inset space \space{}
33746 \begin_inset space \space{}
33750 \begin_inset space \space{}
33754 \begin_inset space \space{}
33758 \begin_inset space \space{}
33761 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33762 code they need to be escaped
33763 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33764 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33765 LatexCommand nomenclature
33766 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33767 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33775 \begin_layout Subsection
33776 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33777 \begin_inset Index idx
33780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33781 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33789 \begin_layout Standard
33790 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33791 -code of the symbol
33793 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33795 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33798 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33799 LatexCommand nomenclature
33801 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33809 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33813 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33814 LatexCommand nomenclature
33817 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33823 They will be sorted by
33824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33850 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33853 will be sorted before the
33857 since the character
33858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33865 is considered in sorting.
33868 \begin_layout Standard
33869 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33877 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33878 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33880 For the example given, you can insert
33884 in this field for the
33885 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33892 will be located before
33893 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33899 \begin_layout Standard
33900 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33905 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33915 \begin_layout Subsection
33916 Nomenclature Options
33917 \begin_inset Index idx
33920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33921 Nomenclature ! Options
33927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33929 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33936 \begin_layout Standard
33941 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33942 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33945 \begin_layout Description
33946 refeq Appends the phrase
33947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33962 to every nomenclature entry, where
33968 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33971 \begin_layout Description
33972 refpage Appends the phrase
33973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33988 to every nomenclature entry, where
33994 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33997 \begin_layout Description
33998 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34001 \begin_layout Standard
34002 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34003 class options list in the
34005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34009 In this document the options
34016 \begin_layout Standard
34017 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34023 \begin_layout Standard
34024 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34025 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34030 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34033 \begin_layout Description
34043 \begin_layout Description
34046 nomrefpage Like the
34053 \begin_layout Description
34056 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34065 \begin_layout Description
34069 \begin_inset space ~
34075 \begin_inset space ~
34080 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34083 \begin_layout Standard
34085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34092 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34093 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34097 \begin_layout Standard
34106 \begin_inset Newline newline
34112 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34116 \begin_inset space ~
34128 unskip, see equation
34131 \begin_inset Newline newline
34138 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34139 \begin_inset Newline newline
34145 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34149 \begin_inset space ~
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34167 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34170 \begin_inset space ~
34175 in the document settings under
34178 \begin_inset space ~
34186 \begin_layout Standard
34194 \begin_inset Newline newline
34198 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34202 \begin_inset space ~
34214 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34216 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34217 \begin_inset Newline newline
34224 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34225 \begin_inset Newline newline
34229 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34233 \begin_inset space ~
34245 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34250 \begin_layout Subsection
34251 Printing the Nomenclature
34252 \begin_inset Index idx
34255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34256 Nomenclature ! Printing
34264 \begin_layout Standard
34265 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34268 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34284 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34285 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34286 You can choose between these settings:
34289 \begin_layout Description
34290 Default a space of 1
34291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34297 \begin_layout Description
34299 \begin_inset space ~
34303 \begin_inset space ~
34306 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34309 \begin_layout Description
34310 Custom custom space
34313 \begin_layout Standard
34314 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34323 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34331 For example, in order to change the name to
34335 , add the following line to the preamble:
34338 \begin_layout Standard
34351 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34354 \begin_layout Standard
34355 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34356 \begin_inset Newline newline
34371 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34374 \begin_layout Subsection
34375 Nomenclature Program
34376 \begin_inset Index idx
34379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34380 Nomenclature ! Program
34386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34388 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34395 \begin_layout Standard
34401 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34402 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34404 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34409 by adding options, see section
34410 \begin_inset space ~
34414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34416 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34421 The available options are listed and explained in
34422 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34424 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34432 \begin_layout Section
34434 \begin_inset Index idx
34437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34444 \begin_inset Index idx
34447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34448 Document ! Branches
34454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34456 name "sec:Branches"
34463 \begin_layout Standard
34464 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34465 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34466 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34467 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34470 \begin_layout Standard
34471 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34472 allows you to put text into branches.
34473 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34474 To create a branch, either select the menu
34476 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34477 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34480 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34482 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34489 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34490 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34491 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34492 and whether the name of the branch should
34493 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34494 (see below for an example).
34495 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34496 to the name of the other) and to add
34497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34509 \begin_inset space ~
34512 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34513 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34516 \begin_layout Standard
34517 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34518 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34523 where you can choose a branch.
34524 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34528 \begin_layout Standard
34529 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34530 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34533 \begin_layout Standard
34534 \begin_inset Branch Question
34538 \begin_layout Standard
34543 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34551 \begin_layout Standard
34552 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34556 \begin_layout Standard
34561 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34569 \begin_layout Standard
34576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34577 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34580 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34581 Consider for example a file
34582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34589 which has the above branches.
34591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34598 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34622 branch were inactive,
34623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34638 branch was active, likewise
34639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34654 branch was active, and
34655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34658 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34662 if both branches were active.
34663 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34664 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34670 \begin_layout Standard
34671 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34677 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34678 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34682 \begin_inset space ~
34690 \begin_layout Standard
34691 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34695 \begin_layout Standard
34701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34708 branch is deactivated.
34714 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34720 \begin_layout Standard
34721 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34722 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34723 definitions for each branch.
34724 For example you can define for the question branch
34728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34729 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34730 -syntax, see section
34731 \begin_inset space ~
34735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34737 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34749 \begin_layout Standard
34759 \begin_layout Standard
34769 \begin_layout Standard
34770 and for the answer branch
34773 \begin_layout Standard
34783 \begin_layout Standard
34793 \begin_layout Standard
34794 \begin_inset Branch Question
34798 \begin_layout Standard
34802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34830 \begin_layout Standard
34831 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34835 \begin_layout Standard
34839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34867 \begin_layout Standard
34868 Now it is possible to use the
34872 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34879 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34882 commands to obtain conditional output.
34883 Here is an example formula where only the
34890 \begin_inset Formula
34892 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34900 \begin_layout Standard
34901 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34909 \begin_layout Standard
34910 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34916 \begin_inset space \space{}
34919 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34921 For this advanced usage, see the
34927 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34932 \begin_layout Section
34934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34936 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34941 \begin_inset Index idx
34944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34953 \begin_layout Standard
34956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34957 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34960 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34962 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34968 \begin_inset Index idx
34971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34973 packages ! hyperref
34978 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34979 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34980 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34981 part of the document.
34984 \begin_layout Standard
34985 The header information in the dialog tab
34989 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34990 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34991 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34992 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34996 \begin_inset space ~
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35005 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35006 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35007 and author entries.
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35015 \begin_inset space ~
35019 \begin_inset space ~
35024 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35027 \begin_layout Standard
35028 You can specify in the dialog tab
35032 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35037 \begin_inset space ~
35041 \begin_inset space ~
35045 \begin_inset space ~
35050 option allows long links to be split;
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35061 \begin_inset space ~
35069 \begin_inset space ~
35074 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35077 \begin_inset space ~
35082 colors the different links.
35083 The default colors are:
35086 \begin_layout Labeling
35087 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35092 for hyperlinks and URLs
35095 \begin_layout Labeling
35096 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35104 \begin_layout Labeling
35105 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35113 \begin_layout Standard
35114 but you can change these in the field
35119 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35122 \begin_layout Standard
35125 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35128 \begin_layout Standard
35133 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35134 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35135 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35143 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35144 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35145 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35155 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35156 when opening the PDF.
35158 \begin_inset space ~
35161 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35162 \begin_inset space ~
35165 1 will only display the sections.
35168 \begin_layout Standard
35169 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35170 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35176 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35177 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35187 \begin_layout Section
35189 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35193 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35200 \begin_layout Subsection
35203 \begin_inset Index idx
35206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35216 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35223 \begin_layout Standard
35224 As \SpecialChar LyX
35225 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35226 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35227 commands and constructs,
35230 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35231 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35232 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35233 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35234 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35235 cannot support all packages and
35239 \begin_layout Standard
35240 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35241 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35242 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35246 Code box is created by the menu
35248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35250 \begin_inset space ~
35255 or by the toolbar button
35268 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35276 \begin_layout Standard
35277 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35279 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35281 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35286 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35291 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35298 , you can write the command part
35304 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35305 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35309 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35310 Code box behind the word.
35311 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35312 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35316 \begin_layout Standard
35317 \begin_inset Graphics
35318 filename clipart/ERT.png
35326 \begin_layout Standard
35330 \begin_layout Standard
35331 This is a line with a
35335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35358 \begin_layout Standard
35359 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35367 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35368 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35369 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35370 know that the command is finished.
35378 \begin_layout Subsection
35379 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35381 \begin_inset Argument 1
35384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35385 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35392 \begin_inset Index idx
35395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35405 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35412 \begin_layout Standard
35413 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35414 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35415 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35416 uses in the background.
35417 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35418 is based on commands, you can
35419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35427 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35428 any time if you know the right commands.
35429 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35430 is the end of the day.
35431 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35432 all caption labels bold.
35433 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35435 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35439 \begin_layout Standard
35440 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35442 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35444 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35447 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35457 \begin_layout Standard
35458 As result you find that the package
35463 \begin_inset Index idx
35466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35474 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35476 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35479 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35483 \begin_inset space ~
35491 \begin_layout Standard
35496 usepackage[options]{package name}
35499 \begin_layout Standard
35500 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35501 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35502 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35503 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35506 \begin_layout Standard
35507 In your case the package name is
35512 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35517 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35518 So you add the command
35521 \begin_layout Standard
35526 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35529 \begin_layout Standard
35530 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35535 For more commands provided by the
35539 package, have a look at its documentation,
35540 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35555 \begin_layout Standard
35556 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35558 For example if you use a
35562 class, you don't need the package
35566 , you can instead write
35569 \begin_layout Standard
35574 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35579 \begin_layout Standard
35580 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35581 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35582 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35589 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35592 \begin_layout Standard
35593 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35594 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35596 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35597 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35598 Code box as described in the previous
35602 \begin_layout Standard
35603 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35604 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35609 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35617 \begin_layout Standard
35618 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35624 \begin_layout Standard
35628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35638 \begin_inset Note Note
35641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35642 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35650 \begin_layout Left Header
35651 \begin_inset Argument 1
35654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35674 \begin_inset Note Note
35677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35678 defines the header line as described below
35686 \begin_layout Center Header
35687 \begin_inset Argument 1
35690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35699 \begin_layout Right Header
35700 \begin_inset Argument 1
35703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35724 \begin_layout Left Footer
35725 \begin_inset Argument 1
35728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35749 \begin_layout Center Footer
35750 \begin_inset Argument 1
35753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35765 \begin_inset Newline newline
35769 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35775 \begin_layout Right Footer
35776 \begin_inset Argument 1
35779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35801 \begin_layout Section
35802 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35805 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35810 \begin_inset Index idx
35813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35814 Document ! Header/Footer line
35820 \begin_inset Index idx
35823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35832 \begin_layout Standard
35833 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35854 \begin_inset space ~
35860 As a second step add in the menu
35862 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35863 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35872 Custom Header/Footerlines
35875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35879 This module offers the following 6
35880 \begin_inset space ~
35886 \begin_layout Description
35888 \begin_inset space ~
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35896 \begin_inset space ~
35900 \begin_inset space ~
35904 \begin_inset space ~
35910 \begin_layout Description
35912 \begin_inset space ~
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35920 \begin_inset space ~
35924 \begin_inset space ~
35928 \begin_inset space ~
35934 \begin_layout Standard
35935 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35936 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35939 \begin_layout Standard
35940 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35941 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35943 \begin_inset space ~
35947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35949 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35953 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35956 \begin_layout Standard
35957 \begin_inset Float figure
35964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35967 \begin_inset Tabular
35968 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35969 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35970 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35971 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35972 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35992 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36003 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36021 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36032 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36036 The normal text on the page goes here.
36037 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36039 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36040 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36045 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36054 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36065 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36083 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36094 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36112 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36130 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36135 name "fig:Page-layout"
36139 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36152 \begin_layout Standard
36153 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36161 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36165 \begin_inset space ~
36170 is set to “Default”.
36171 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36180 \begin_layout Subsection
36184 \begin_layout Standard
36185 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36186 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36187 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36188 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36190 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36192 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36195 \begin_layout Standard
36196 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36197 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36203 \begin_inset space ~
36211 \begin_layout Description
36214 thepage prints the current page number
36217 \begin_layout Description
36220 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36223 \begin_layout Description
36226 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36229 \begin_layout Description
36232 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36233 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36240 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36243 because it usually goes in a left header.
36246 \begin_layout Description
36249 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36250 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36252 It is normally used in the right header.
36255 \begin_layout Subsection
36256 Default header/footer
36259 \begin_layout Standard
36260 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36261 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36262 footer has the page number.
36263 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36264 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36265 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36268 \begin_inset space ~
36276 \begin_layout Subsection
36280 \begin_layout Standard
36281 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36282 Some pages are different.
36283 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36284 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36285 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36286 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36287 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36291 Header and footer decoration line
36294 \begin_layout Standard
36295 By default, you get a 0.4
36296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36299 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36300 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36312 in the following way:
36315 \begin_layout Standard
36322 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36325 \begin_layout Standard
36326 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36339 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36346 \begin_layout Standard
36347 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36349 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36350 \begin_inset space ~
36354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36365 Several header/footer lines
36368 \begin_layout Standard
36369 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36370 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36371 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36373 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36389 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36399 \begin_layout Standard
36406 headheight}{height}
36409 \begin_layout Standard
36414 is a size in standard units (e.
36415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36419 \begin_inset space \space{}
36427 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36428 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36429 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36430 logfile with the menu
36432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36442 \begin_inset space ~
36447 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36452 \begin_inset Index idx
36455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36457 packages ! fancyhdr
36463 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36464 for your header/footer.
36467 \begin_layout Subsection
36471 \begin_layout Standard
36472 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36473 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36474 This example consists of the following definition:
36477 \begin_layout Description
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36488 , empty optional argument
36491 \begin_layout Description
36493 \begin_inset space ~
36496 Header empty, empty optional argument
36499 \begin_layout Description
36501 \begin_inset space ~
36510 in the optional argument
36513 \begin_layout Description
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36524 in the optional argument
36527 \begin_layout Description
36529 \begin_inset space ~
36542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36546 \begin_inset Newline newline
36550 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36557 in the optional argument
36560 \begin_layout Description
36562 \begin_inset space ~
36571 , empty optional argument
36574 \begin_layout Description
36577 headrulewidth set to 2
36578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36584 \begin_layout Standard
36585 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36586 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36602 \begin_layout Standard
36603 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36609 \begin_layout Standard
36613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36617 pagestyle{headings}
36623 \begin_inset Note Note
36626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36627 switches back to page style with the default headings
36635 \begin_layout Section
36636 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36639 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36644 \begin_inset Index idx
36647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36654 \begin_inset Index idx
36657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36666 \begin_layout Standard
36668 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36669 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36670 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36673 \begin_layout Subsection
36677 \begin_layout Standard
36678 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36684 \begin_inset Index idx
36687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36689 packages ! preview-latex
36694 (on some systems named simply
36699 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36701 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36708 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36710 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36718 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36719 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36720 -package are automatically
36721 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36725 \begin_layout Subsection
36729 \begin_layout Standard
36730 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36731 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36733 activate the option
36736 \begin_inset space ~
36743 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36749 \begin_inset space ~
36753 \begin_inset space ~
36756 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36763 \begin_inset space ~
36776 \begin_inset space ~
36781 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36784 \begin_layout Standard
36785 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36790 \begin_inset space ~
36798 \begin_inset space ~
36806 \begin_layout Standard
36807 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36808 and when you finish
36812 \begin_layout Standard
36813 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36821 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36822 generated by activating the option
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36831 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36839 \begin_layout Subsection
36840 Selected document parts
36843 \begin_layout Standard
36844 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36845 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36846 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36847 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36849 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36855 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36856 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36857 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36860 \begin_layout Standard
36861 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36868 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36880 is explained in section
36882 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36887 \begin_inset space ~
36897 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36898 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36899 the final rotated boxes,
36900 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36901 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36903 Here is the result:
36906 \begin_layout Standard
36907 \begin_inset Preview
36909 \begin_layout Standard
36914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36918 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36924 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36934 height_special "totalheight"
36939 backgroundcolor "none"
36942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36967 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36973 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36995 \begin_layout Standard
36996 Previewing works also for colors.
36997 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37016 is explained in section
37023 \begin_inset space ~
37036 \begin_layout Standard
37037 \begin_inset Preview
37039 \begin_layout Standard
37043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37062 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37067 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37086 \begin_layout Standard
37087 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37093 \begin_layout Standard
37094 If \SpecialChar LyX
37095 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37096 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37097 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37098 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37099 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37100 the \SpecialChar TeX
37102 If \SpecialChar LyX
37103 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37104 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37106 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37107 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37108 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37111 \begin_layout Subsection
37116 \begin_layout Standard
37117 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37118 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37121 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37128 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37130 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37132 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37133 's main window, then only this selection
37134 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37135 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37136 the source view window.
37141 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37142 ; but note that if you have
37143 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37145 not just the one which is open at the time.
37148 \begin_layout Section
37149 Advanced Find and Replace
37150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37152 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37157 \begin_inset Index idx
37160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37167 \begin_inset Index idx
37170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37179 \begin_layout Subsection
37183 \begin_layout Standard
37184 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37185 allows for searching of complex,
37186 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37188 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37189 The key-features are:
37192 \begin_layout Itemize
37193 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37194 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37195 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37199 \begin_layout Itemize
37200 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37201 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37202 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37203 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37206 \begin_layout Itemize
37207 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37208 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37209 outside of mathematics environments
37212 \begin_layout Itemize
37213 Search may be widened to a specific
37218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37222 \begin_inset space ~
37225 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37226 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37233 \begin_layout Itemize
37234 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37235 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37240 \begin_inset space ~
37243 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37246 \begin_layout Subsection
37250 \begin_layout Standard
37251 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37253 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37266 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37269 ) or the toolbar button
37272 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37278 Advanced Find and Replace
37283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37287 \begin_layout Standard
37293 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37297 \begin_inset space ~
37302 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37305 arg "paragraph-break"
37309 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37310 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37314 arg "paragraph-break"
37317 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37321 searches backwards.
37324 \begin_layout Standard
37328 \begin_inset space ~
37333 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37342 \begin_inset space ~
37347 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37351 Searching for mathematics
37354 \begin_layout Standard
37355 Mathematical formulas, such as
37356 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37359 or something more complex like
37360 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37363 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37368 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37369 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37370 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37371 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37381 \begin_layout Standard
37382 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37383 This is done by switching to the
37387 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37392 This way, entering in the
37399 \begin_layout Itemize
37400 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37401 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37404 \begin_layout Itemize
37405 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37406 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37409 \begin_layout Itemize
37410 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37411 of it only within section headings.
37412 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37413 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37417 \begin_layout Itemize
37418 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37419 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37426 \begin_layout Standard
37427 The entries made in the
37431 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37434 \begin_inset space ~
37440 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37444 button or alternatively press
37447 arg "paragraph-break"
37454 while the cursor is in the
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37465 \begin_layout Standard
37466 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37468 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37472 \begin_layout Itemize
37473 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37474 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37482 with its typewriter version
37483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37497 \begin_layout Itemize
37498 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37504 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37516 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37523 (you may want to enable the
37526 \begin_inset space ~
37534 \begin_inset space ~
37539 options and disable the
37547 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37555 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37556 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37560 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37563 , or occurrences of
37564 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37568 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37574 \begin_layout Subsection
37578 \begin_layout Standard
37579 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37584 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37586 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37588 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37598 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37604 This is done with the context menu
37606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37607 Insert Regular Expression
37609 while the cursor is in the
37614 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37615 expression matching rules
37619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37620 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37630 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37631 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37637 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37638 same text in the document.
37639 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37640 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37643 \begin_layout Enumerate
37644 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37649 editor the fraction
37650 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37654 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37657 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37658 fractions with the given denominator.
37661 \begin_layout Enumerate
37662 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37674 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37679 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37680 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37681 Also, by inserting a
37682 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37685 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37686 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37689 \begin_layout Standard
37690 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37691 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37692 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37695 , and referring back to them through
37696 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37700 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37704 For example, try searching with the regexp
37705 \begin_inset Newline newline
37708 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37711 \begin_inset Newline newline
37714 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37717 \begin_layout Standard
37718 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37721 \begin_layout Standard
37722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37730 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37731 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37732 sub-expressions is absolute.
37734 \begin_inset space ~
37738 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37741 always refers to the first occurrence of
37742 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37745 in all entered regexps.
37753 \begin_layout Section
37755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37757 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37762 \begin_inset Index idx
37765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37774 \begin_layout Standard
37776 has a built-in spell checker.
37779 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37786 key or the toolbar button
37789 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37792 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37793 beginning of the currently selected text.
37794 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37795 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37796 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37797 scrolled so that it is visible.
37798 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37799 n, if any could be found.
37800 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37804 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37805 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37808 \begin_layout Standard
37809 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37816 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37817 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37819 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37820 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37823 \begin_inset space ~
37831 arg "dialog-show character"
37834 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37836 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37839 \begin_layout Standard
37840 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37841 can be downloaded from here:
37842 \begin_inset Newline newline
37846 \begin_inset Flex URL
37849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37851 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37857 \begin_inset Newline newline
37861 \begin_inset space ~
37864 files for each language.
37865 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37866 \begin_inset space ~
37869 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37870 's installation subfolder
37878 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37880 \begin_inset Newline newline
37883 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37884 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37885 but in most cases these are
37901 is the language code.
37904 \begin_layout Subsection
37908 \begin_layout Standard
37911 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37912 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37914 \begin_inset space ~
37917 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37920 you can set the following things:
37923 \begin_layout Description
37925 \begin_inset space ~
37928 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37929 should use for spell checking.
37930 Depending on your platform,
37940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37941 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37942 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37957 \begin_inset space ~
37960 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37963 \begin_layout Description
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37968 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37969 will always use the given language
37970 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37973 \begin_layout Description
37975 \begin_inset space ~
37978 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37984 \begin_inset space \space{}
37988 This should normally not be needed.
37991 \begin_layout Description
37993 \begin_inset space ~
37997 \begin_inset space ~
38000 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38012 \begin_layout Description
38014 \begin_inset space ~
38017 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38018 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38019 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38020 appear in a context menu.
38021 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38025 \begin_layout Description
38027 \begin_inset space ~
38031 \begin_inset space ~
38035 \begin_inset space ~
38038 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38042 \begin_layout Section
38044 \begin_inset Index idx
38047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38056 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38063 \begin_layout Standard
38065 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38066 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38076 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38078 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38088 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38090 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38091 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38092 which are available for many languages.
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38096 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38097 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38101 \begin_layout Subsection
38102 Setting up the thesaurus
38105 \begin_layout Standard
38114 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38118 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38123 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38137 For instance, the US English files are named:
38140 \begin_layout Itemize
38144 \begin_layout Itemize
38148 \begin_layout Standard
38157 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38158 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38161 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38162 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38163 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38165 \begin_inset space ~
38170 ) to the path where they are installed.
38174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38175 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38176 ies, typical locations are
38182 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38186 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38190 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38193 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38199 LibreOffice-<Version>
38206 On the Mac, the default location is
38208 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38209 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38210 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38211 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38212 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38213 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38221 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38222 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38223 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38227 \begin_layout Standard
38228 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38229 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
38231 \begin_inset Newline newline
38235 \begin_inset Flex URL
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38240 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38248 \begin_layout Standard
38249 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38250 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38252 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38253 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38254 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38256 \begin_inset space ~
38261 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38263 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38264 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38268 \begin_layout Standard
38269 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38271 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38274 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38280 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38283 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38284 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38293 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38294 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38301 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38304 \begin_layout Subsection
38305 Using the thesaurus
38308 \begin_layout Standard
38309 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38311 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38314 or the toolbar button
38317 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38320 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38322 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38324 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38325 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38326 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38335 ), related terms (such as
38338 \begin_inset space ~
38347 ), compounds (such as
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38359 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38368 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38371 \begin_layout Standard
38372 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38373 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38377 \begin_layout Standard
38378 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38379 the dictionary, such as the above
38383 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38388 \begin_inset space \space{}
38391 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38392 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38393 For example, looking up the word form
38397 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38402 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38407 \begin_inset space \space{}
38418 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38419 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38420 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38423 \begin_layout Section
38425 \begin_inset Index idx
38428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38435 \begin_inset Index idx
38438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38439 Document ! Change Tracking
38445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38447 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38454 \begin_layout Standard
38455 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38456 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38457 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38458 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38460 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38462 \begin_inset space ~
38465 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38467 \begin_inset space ~
38475 \begin_layout Standard
38476 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38490 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38491 You can change the color in
38493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38494 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38496 \begin_inset space ~
38500 \begin_inset space ~
38505 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38511 \begin_inset Index idx
38514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38515 Color ! Change tracking
38520 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38521 's status bar when the
38522 cursor is in changed text.
38523 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38526 arg "changes-merge"
38532 \begin_layout Standard
38533 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38535 \begin_inset Index idx
38538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38547 \begin_layout Standard
38548 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38554 \begin_layout Standard
38555 \begin_inset Graphics
38556 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38564 \begin_layout Standard
38565 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38571 \begin_layout Standard
38572 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38575 \begin_layout Standard
38576 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38582 \begin_layout Standard
38583 \begin_inset Tabular
38584 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38585 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38586 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38587 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38597 arg "changes-track"
38605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38613 \begin_inset space ~
38616 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38618 \begin_inset space ~
38627 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38636 arg "changes-output"
38644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38650 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38652 \begin_inset space ~
38655 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38657 \begin_inset space ~
38661 \begin_inset space ~
38665 \begin_inset space ~
38674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 Jumps to the next change
38701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38710 arg "change-accept"
38718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38726 \begin_inset space ~
38729 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38731 \begin_inset space ~
38740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38749 arg "change-reject"
38757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38765 \begin_inset space ~
38768 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38770 \begin_inset space ~
38779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38788 arg "changes-merge"
38796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38807 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38809 \begin_inset space ~
38818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 arg "all-changes-accept"
38835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38843 \begin_inset space ~
38846 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38848 \begin_inset space ~
38852 \begin_inset space ~
38861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38870 arg "all-changes-reject"
38878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38886 \begin_inset space ~
38889 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38891 \begin_inset space ~
38895 \begin_inset space ~
38904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38928 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38962 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38964 \begin_inset space ~
38980 \begin_layout Standard
38981 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38987 \begin_layout Standard
38988 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39008 \begin_layout Standard
39009 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39010 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39011 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39012 the next change after the current cursor position.
39013 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39014 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39015 step to the next change.
39016 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39019 \begin_layout Standard
39020 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39021 to describe a change.
39024 \begin_layout Standard
39026 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39027 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39033 \begin_inset Index idx
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39044 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39046 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39053 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39059 \begin_layout Section
39060 Comparison of Documents
39061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39063 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39068 \begin_inset Index idx
39071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39072 Comparison of documents
39080 \begin_layout Standard
39081 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39088 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39089 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39091 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39093 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39097 \begin_inset space ~
39101 \begin_inset space ~
39105 \begin_inset space ~
39114 \begin_inset space ~
39118 \begin_inset space ~
39122 \begin_inset space ~
39126 \begin_inset space ~
39130 \begin_inset space ~
39134 \begin_inset space ~
39139 enables the change tracking option
39142 \begin_inset space ~
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39155 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39158 \begin_layout Section
39159 International Support
39160 \begin_inset Index idx
39163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39164 International support
39172 \begin_layout Standard
39173 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39174 with any language you want.
39175 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39176 up \SpecialChar LyX
39178 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39180 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39188 \begin_layout Standard
39189 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39190 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39191 \begin_inset space ~
39195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39197 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39204 \begin_layout Subsection
39206 \begin_inset Index idx
39209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39216 \begin_inset Index idx
39219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39220 Document ! Settings
39226 \begin_inset Index idx
39229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39230 Document ! Language
39238 \begin_layout Standard
39241 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39242 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39245 dialog lets you set
39247 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39252 \begin_layout Standard
39257 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39262 \begin_inset space ~
39267 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39268 For details about the different encoding options see section
39269 \begin_inset space ~
39273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39275 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39282 \begin_layout Subsection
39283 Keyboard mapping configuration
39284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39286 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39293 \begin_layout Standard
39294 If you have for example a U.
39295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39298 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39299 can use an alternate keymap.
39300 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39305 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39306 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39307 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39310 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39311 \begin_inset space ~
39315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39317 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39322 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39323 which one you want to use.
39326 \begin_layout Standard
39327 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39328 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39329 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39333 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39334 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39335 one to support the characters you want.
39336 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39343 \begin_layout Chapter
39346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39348 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39355 \begin_layout Standard
39356 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39357 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39358 topic inside the user's guide.
39361 \begin_layout Section
39363 \begin_inset Index idx
39366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39375 \begin_layout Standard
39380 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39383 \begin_layout Subsection
39387 \begin_layout Standard
39388 Creates a new document.
39391 \begin_layout Subsection
39395 \begin_layout Standard
39396 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39397 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39398 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39400 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39401 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39407 \begin_layout Subsection
39411 \begin_layout Standard
39415 \begin_layout Subsection
39419 \begin_layout Standard
39420 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39421 Click there on a file to open it.
39424 \begin_layout Subsection
39426 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39430 \begin_layout Standard
39432 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39433 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39437 \begin_layout Subsection
39441 \begin_layout Standard
39442 Closes the current document.
39445 \begin_layout Subsection
39449 \begin_layout Standard
39450 Closes all opened documents.
39453 \begin_layout Subsection
39457 \begin_layout Standard
39458 Saves the actual document.
39461 \begin_layout Subsection
39465 \begin_layout Standard
39466 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39467 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39471 \begin_layout Subsection
39473 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39477 \begin_layout Standard
39479 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39480 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39486 \begin_layout Subsection
39490 \begin_layout Standard
39491 Saves all opened documents.
39494 \begin_layout Subsection
39498 \begin_layout Standard
39499 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39502 \begin_layout Subsection
39506 \begin_layout Standard
39507 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39508 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39509 It is described in the section
39511 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39516 Additional Features
39521 \begin_layout Subsection
39525 \begin_layout Standard
39526 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39527 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39529 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39530 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39534 \begin_layout Standard
39535 When using the menu entry
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39543 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39547 \begin_inset space ~
39551 \begin_inset space ~
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39560 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39561 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39564 \begin_layout Subsection
39566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39568 name "subsec:Export"
39575 \begin_layout Standard
39576 You can export your document to various file formats.
39577 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39579 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39580 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39581 during its configuration.
39584 \begin_layout Standard
39585 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39587 \begin_inset space ~
39591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39593 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39600 \begin_layout Description
39606 \begin_inset space ~
39609 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39614 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39615 \begin_inset Newline newline
39618 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39619 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39623 \begin_layout Description
39624 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39630 \begin_layout Description
39632 \begin_inset space ~
39635 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39641 \begin_layout Description
39642 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39643 's native DVI-format.
39644 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39645 files paths or file names in your document.
39647 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39654 \begin_layout Description
39655 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39656 in files paths or file names
39659 \begin_layout Description
39661 \begin_inset space ~
39668 ) DVI-format using the program
39670 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39673 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39677 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39685 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39693 \begin_layout Description
39695 \begin_inset space ~
39698 (cropped) the same as
39702 but with cropped page margins.
39705 \begin_layout Description
39707 \begin_inset space ~
39710 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39714 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39719 \begin_layout Description
39723 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39731 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39739 \begin_layout Description
39741 \begin_inset space ~
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39748 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39752 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39760 \begin_layout Description
39764 \begin_inset space ~
39773 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39774 source that is compilable with the program
39776 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39780 \begin_layout Description
39784 \begin_inset space ~
39789 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39790 source, additionally all images used in the document
39791 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39795 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39798 \begin_layout Description
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39807 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39808 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39809 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39817 \begin_layout Description
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39830 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39831 source that is compilable with the program
39837 \begin_layout Description
39839 \begin_inset space ~
39843 \begin_inset space ~
39850 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39851 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39857 \begin_layout Description
39859 \begin_inset space ~
39862 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39863 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39869 \begin_inset space \space{}
39874 \begin_inset space ~
39878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39893 represent the version number)
39896 \begin_layout Description
39898 \begin_inset space ~
39902 \begin_inset space ~
39905 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39906 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39907 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39911 \begin_layout Description
39912 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39913 's internal XHTML engine
39916 \begin_layout Description
39918 \begin_inset space ~
39922 \begin_inset space ~
39926 \begin_inset space ~
39930 \begin_inset space ~
39933 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39938 For the conversion the program
39947 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39950 \begin_layout Description
39951 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39956 \begin_layout Description
39958 \begin_inset space ~
39961 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39963 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39966 For the conversion the program
39975 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39978 \begin_layout Description
39980 \begin_inset space ~
39983 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39984 For the conversion the program
39993 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39996 \begin_layout Description
39998 \begin_inset space ~
40001 (cropped) the same as
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40009 but with cropped page margins
40012 \begin_layout Description
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40021 PDF-format using the program
40025 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40028 \begin_layout Description
40032 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_inset space ~
40049 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40054 \begin_inset space \space{}
40057 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40061 \begin_layout Description
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40070 PDF-format using the program
40072 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40075 , produces PDF-files directly
40078 \begin_layout Description
40082 \begin_inset space ~
40087 PDF-format using the program
40091 , produces PDF-files directly
40094 \begin_layout Description
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40103 PDF-format using the program
40107 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40110 \begin_layout Description
40114 \begin_inset space ~
40119 PDF-format using the program
40124 , produces PDF-files directly
40127 \begin_layout Description
40131 \begin_inset space ~
40139 \begin_layout Description
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40147 \begin_inset space ~
40152 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40153 and then exported as text using the program
40158 \begin_layout Description
40163 PostScript format using the program
40171 options see section
40172 \begin_inset space ~
40176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40178 reference "subsec:General-output"
40185 \begin_layout Description
40186 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40187 source and also code in the statistical programming
40201 it is possible to use
40205 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40209 \begin_layout Standard
40210 If one of the menu entries
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40226 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40228 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40236 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40241 \begin_inset Index idx
40244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40245 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40254 \begin_layout Subsection
40258 \begin_layout Standard
40259 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40260 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40263 \begin_inset space ~
40267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40269 reference "sec:Paths"
40274 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40283 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40284 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40285 's preferences as described in section
40286 \begin_inset space ~
40290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40292 reference "subsec:Converters"
40299 \begin_layout Subsection
40300 New and Close Window
40303 \begin_layout Standard
40304 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40308 \begin_layout Subsection
40312 \begin_layout Standard
40313 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40316 \begin_layout Section
40318 \begin_inset Index idx
40321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40330 \begin_layout Subsection
40334 \begin_layout Standard
40335 Described in section
40336 \begin_inset space ~
40340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40342 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40349 \begin_layout Subsection
40350 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40353 \begin_layout Standard
40354 Described in section
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40361 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40368 \begin_layout Subsection
40372 \begin_layout Standard
40373 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40374 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40377 \begin_layout Subsection
40381 \begin_layout Standard
40382 Selects the whole document.
40385 \begin_layout Subsection
40386 Find & Replace (Quick)
40389 \begin_layout Standard
40390 Described in section
40391 \begin_inset space ~
40395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40397 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40404 \begin_layout Subsection
40405 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40408 \begin_layout Standard
40409 Described in section
40410 \begin_inset space ~
40414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40416 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40423 \begin_layout Subsection
40424 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40427 \begin_layout Standard
40428 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40432 \begin_layout Subsection
40434 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40438 \begin_layout Standard
40440 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40441 Described in section
40442 \begin_inset space ~
40446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40448 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40457 \begin_layout Subsection
40459 \begin_inset Index idx
40462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40463 Paragraph ! Settings
40471 \begin_layout Standard
40472 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40473 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40477 \begin_layout Standard
40478 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40479 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40485 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40486 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40488 \begin_inset space ~
40494 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40498 \begin_layout Subsection
40500 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40504 \begin_layout Standard
40506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40507 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40512 \begin_layout Enumerate
40514 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40515 Customize text properties by means of the
40521 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40524 ; this is described in section
40525 \begin_inset space ~
40529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40531 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40538 \begin_layout Enumerate
40540 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40541 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40543 Apply last settings
40546 \begin_layout Enumerate
40548 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40549 Change the casing of selected text (
40564 \begin_layout Subsection
40566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40570 \begin_layout Standard
40572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40573 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40574 text styles (in the case of this document:
40596 \begin_inset space ~
40600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40602 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40611 \begin_layout Subsection
40612 Table and Rows & Columns
40615 \begin_layout Standard
40616 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40617 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40618 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40621 \begin_layout Subsection
40625 \begin_layout Standard
40626 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40627 It will dissolve this inset.
40628 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40632 \begin_layout Subsection
40636 \begin_layout Standard
40637 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40638 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40641 \begin_layout Subsection
40642 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40645 \begin_layout Standard
40646 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40648 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40649 \begin_inset space ~
40653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40655 reference "sec:Nesting"
40660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40662 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40669 \begin_layout Section
40671 \begin_inset Index idx
40674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40683 \begin_layout Standard
40684 At the bottom of the
40688 menu the opened documents are listed.
40691 \begin_layout Subsection
40692 Open/Close all Insets
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40696 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40699 \begin_layout Subsection
40700 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40703 \begin_layout Standard
40704 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40707 \begin_layout Standard
40708 Math macros are described in the
40715 \begin_layout Subsection
40719 \begin_layout Standard
40720 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40721 \begin_inset space ~
40725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40727 reference "sec:Navigating"
40732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40734 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40741 \begin_layout Subsection
40745 \begin_layout Standard
40746 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40754 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40761 \begin_layout Subsection
40765 \begin_layout Standard
40766 Opens a window showing console messages.
40767 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40772 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40773 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40774 is processing the document.
40777 \begin_layout Subsection
40779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40781 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40786 \begin_inset Index idx
40789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40798 \begin_layout Standard
40799 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40801 All toolbars and the
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40809 can be turned on and off.
40814 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40843 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40847 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40854 \begin_layout Standard
40859 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40863 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40864 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40865 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40866 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40867 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40870 \begin_layout Standard
40872 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40879 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40886 \begin_layout Subsection
40890 \begin_layout Standard
40894 \begin_inset space ~
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40919 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40920 's main window vertically while
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40931 \begin_inset space ~
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40943 \begin_inset space ~
40948 will split it horizontally.
40949 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40950 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40951 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40952 three or more documents at the same time.
40953 To close a split view, use the menu
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40968 \begin_layout Subsection
40972 \begin_layout Standard
40973 Closes a split view.
40976 \begin_layout Subsection
40980 \begin_layout Standard
40981 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40982 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40983 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40984 's main window fullscreen.
40985 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40986 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40989 \begin_layout Section
40991 \begin_inset Index idx
40994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41003 \begin_layout Subsection
41007 \begin_layout Standard
41008 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41015 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41026 \begin_layout Subsection
41028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41030 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41037 \begin_layout Standard
41038 Here you can insert the following characters:
41041 \begin_layout Description
41046 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41049 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41050 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41051 -packages you have installed.
41052 You can get a complete display by checking
41055 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_inset Newline newline
41065 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41073 Not all characters will be visible in the
41077 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41078 dialog (see section
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41085 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41089 ) can display every character.
41097 \begin_layout Description
41098 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41102 \begin_layout Description
41104 \begin_inset space ~
41108 \begin_inset space ~
41111 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41118 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41125 \begin_layout Description
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41130 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41133 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41134 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41140 \begin_layout Description
41142 \begin_inset space ~
41145 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41149 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41155 \begin_layout Description
41157 \begin_inset space ~
41160 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41164 \begin_layout Description
41166 \begin_inset space ~
41169 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41173 \begin_layout Description
41175 \begin_inset space ~
41179 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41180 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41186 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41191 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41197 \begin_inset space \space{}
41200 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41201 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41210 To insert a fraction use the command
41215 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41219 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41228 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41240 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41244 \begin_layout Description
41246 \begin_inset space ~
41250 \begin_inset Index idx
41253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41260 \begin_inset Index idx
41263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41264 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41269 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41270 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41272 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41278 \begin_inset Index idx
41281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41289 \begin_inset Newline newline
41292 More information about this feature can be found in the
41298 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41304 \begin_layout Description
41305 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41307 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41308 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41312 \begin_layout Subsection
41316 \begin_layout Standard
41317 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41320 \begin_layout Description
41321 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41322 \begin_inset script superscript
41324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41333 \begin_layout Description
41334 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41335 \begin_inset script subscript
41337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41346 \begin_layout Description
41348 \begin_inset space ~
41351 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41352 \begin_inset space ~
41356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41358 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41365 \begin_layout Description
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41370 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41377 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41384 \begin_layout Description
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41389 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41390 \begin_inset space ~
41394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41396 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41403 \begin_layout Description
41405 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41410 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41416 \begin_inset space \space{}
41419 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41420 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41429 To insert a fraction use the command
41434 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41438 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41447 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41456 \begin_layout Description
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41461 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41462 \begin_inset space ~
41466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41468 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41475 \begin_layout Description
41477 \begin_inset space ~
41480 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41487 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41494 \begin_layout Description
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41499 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41500 \begin_inset space ~
41504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41506 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41513 \begin_layout Description
41514 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41521 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41528 \begin_layout Description
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41533 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41540 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41547 \begin_layout Description
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41552 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41553 \begin_inset space ~
41557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41559 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41566 \begin_layout Description
41568 \begin_inset space ~
41572 \begin_inset space ~
41575 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41578 \begin_inset space ~
41582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41584 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41591 for a usage example.
41594 \begin_layout Description
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41600 \begin_inset space ~
41603 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41604 \begin_inset space ~
41608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41610 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41617 \begin_layout Description
41619 \begin_inset space ~
41622 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41623 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41626 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41627 \begin_inset space ~
41631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41633 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41640 \begin_layout Description
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41645 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41646 \begin_inset space ~
41650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41652 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41659 \begin_layout Description
41661 \begin_inset space ~
41664 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41665 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41673 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41680 \begin_layout Description
41682 \begin_inset space ~
41685 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41692 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41699 \begin_layout Description
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41705 \begin_inset space ~
41708 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41709 \begin_inset space ~
41713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41715 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41722 \begin_layout Subsection
41724 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41728 \begin_layout Standard
41730 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41731 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41732 The submenu allows you to insert
41735 \begin_layout Description
41737 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41739 \begin_inset space ~
41742 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41745 \begin_layout Description
41747 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41749 \begin_inset space ~
41753 \begin_inset space ~
41756 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41760 \begin_layout Description
41762 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41764 \begin_inset space ~
41767 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41770 \begin_layout Description
41772 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41774 \begin_inset space ~
41777 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41780 \begin_layout Description
41782 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41784 \begin_inset space ~
41788 \begin_inset space ~
41791 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41795 \begin_layout Description
41797 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41799 \begin_inset space ~
41802 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41805 \begin_layout Description
41807 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41820 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41823 \begin_layout Description
41825 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41827 \begin_inset space ~
41830 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41832 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41833 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41839 \begin_layout Description
41841 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41846 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41848 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41849 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41855 \begin_layout Description
41857 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41858 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41859 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41860 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41863 \begin_layout Subsection
41866 List/Contents/References
41869 \begin_layout Standard
41870 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41874 \begin_inset space ~
41895 are described in section
41896 \begin_inset space ~
41900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41902 reference "sec:toc"
41911 is described in section
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41918 reference "sec:Index"
41926 is described in section
41927 \begin_inset space ~
41931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41933 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41939 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41942 is described in section
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41949 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41956 \begin_layout Subsection
41960 \begin_layout Standard
41961 To insert floats, as described in section
41962 \begin_inset space ~
41966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41968 reference "sec:Floats"
41972 and in detail the chapter
41979 \begin_inset space ~
41987 \begin_layout Subsection
41991 \begin_layout Standard
41992 To insert notes, described in section
41993 \begin_inset space ~
41997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41999 reference "sec:Notes"
42006 \begin_layout Subsection
42010 \begin_layout Standard
42011 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42013 Branches are described in section
42014 \begin_inset space ~
42018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42020 reference "sec:Branches"
42027 \begin_layout Subsection
42031 \begin_layout Standard
42032 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42033 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42035 An example is the document class
42036 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42046 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42055 with three custom insets.
42058 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42062 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42068 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42071 \begin_layout Subsection
42073 \begin_inset Index idx
42076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42085 \begin_layout Standard
42086 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42088 For more information see chapter
42090 External Document Parts
42093 \begin_inset space ~
42099 \begin_layout Subsection
42101 \begin_inset Index idx
42104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42113 \begin_layout Standard
42114 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42115 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42122 \begin_inset space ~
42130 \begin_layout Subsection
42134 \begin_layout Standard
42139 dialog as described in section
42140 \begin_inset space ~
42144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42146 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42153 \begin_layout Subsection
42157 \begin_layout Standard
42162 as described in section
42163 \begin_inset space ~
42167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42169 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42176 \begin_layout Subsection
42180 \begin_layout Standard
42185 as described in section
42186 \begin_inset space ~
42190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42192 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42199 \begin_layout Subsection
42201 \begin_inset Index idx
42204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42211 \begin_inset Index idx
42214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42215 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42223 \begin_layout Standard
42224 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42225 Floats are described in section
42226 \begin_inset space ~
42230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42232 reference "sec:Floats"
42236 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42239 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42247 \begin_inset space ~
42255 \begin_layout Subsection
42259 \begin_layout Standard
42260 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42261 \begin_inset space ~
42265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42267 reference "sec:Index"
42274 \begin_layout Subsection
42278 \begin_layout Standard
42279 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42280 \begin_inset space ~
42284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42286 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42293 \begin_layout Subsection
42297 \begin_layout Standard
42298 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42299 Tables are described in section
42300 \begin_inset space ~
42304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42306 reference "sec:Tables"
42310 and in detail in the chapter
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42325 \begin_layout Subsection
42329 \begin_layout Standard
42335 Graphics are described in section
42336 \begin_inset space ~
42340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42342 reference "sec:Graphics"
42349 \begin_layout Subsection
42353 \begin_layout Standard
42354 Inserts a URL as described in section
42355 \begin_inset space ~
42359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42361 reference "subsec:URLs"
42368 \begin_layout Subsection
42372 \begin_layout Standard
42373 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42374 \begin_inset space ~
42378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42380 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42387 \begin_layout Subsection
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42392 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42393 \begin_inset space ~
42397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42399 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42406 \begin_layout Subsection
42410 \begin_layout Standard
42411 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42418 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42425 \begin_layout Subsection
42428 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42431 \begin_layout Standard
42432 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42433 environments of the same type.
42435 \begin_inset space ~
42439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42441 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42445 for an explanation.
42448 \begin_layout Subsection
42452 \begin_layout Standard
42453 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42454 title or caption of a float.
42455 Inserts a short title as described in section
42456 \begin_inset space ~
42460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42462 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42469 \begin_layout Subsection
42474 \begin_layout Standard
42475 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42476 Code box as described in section
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42483 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42490 \begin_layout Subsection
42492 \begin_inset Index idx
42495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42504 \begin_layout Standard
42505 Inserts a program listings box.
42506 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42508 Program Code Listings
42513 \begin_inset space ~
42521 \begin_layout Subsection
42523 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42527 \begin_layout Standard
42529 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42530 Inserts the actual date.
42531 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42538 \begin_layout Subsection
42542 \begin_layout Standard
42543 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42544 \begin_inset space ~
42548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42550 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42557 \begin_layout Section
42559 \begin_inset Index idx
42562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42571 \begin_layout Standard
42572 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42573 \begin_inset space ~
42576 of the current document.
42577 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42580 \begin_layout Subsection
42584 \begin_layout Standard
42585 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42586 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42587 to jump, for example, between section
42588 \begin_inset space ~
42592 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42593 \begin_inset space ~
42596 2.5 and use the submenu
42599 \begin_inset space ~
42603 \begin_inset space ~
42610 \begin_inset space ~
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42620 \begin_inset space ~
42626 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42630 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42636 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42639 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42642 \begin_layout Standard
42643 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42647 \begin_inset space ~
42652 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42655 \begin_inset space ~
42660 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42663 \begin_layout Subsection
42664 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42667 \begin_layout Standard
42668 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42672 \begin_layout Subsection
42676 \begin_layout Standard
42677 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42678 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42679 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42683 \begin_inset space ~
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42695 \begin_layout Subsection
42699 \begin_layout Standard
42700 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42703 The \SpecialChar LyX
42704 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42706 \begin_inset space ~
42714 \begin_inset space ~
42719 manual for a detailed description.
42722 \begin_layout Section
42724 \begin_inset Index idx
42727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42736 \begin_layout Subsection
42740 \begin_layout Standard
42741 Change Tracking is described in section
42742 \begin_inset space ~
42746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42748 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42755 \begin_layout Subsection
42763 \begin_layout Standard
42764 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42765 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42766 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42768 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42769 to the clipboard or update the view.
42770 \begin_inset Newline newline
42773 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42777 \begin_layout Standard
42780 Open Containing Directory
42782 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42783 's temporary folder for the document.
42784 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42785 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42786 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42787 For example some journals require to send the
42791 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42795 \begin_layout Subsection
42796 Start Appendix Here
42799 \begin_layout Standard
42800 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42801 as described in section
42802 \begin_inset space ~
42806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42808 reference "sec:Appendices"
42815 \begin_layout Subsection
42817 \begin_inset space ~
42823 \begin_layout Standard
42824 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42825 default output format for the document (menu
42827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42828 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42829 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42831 \begin_inset space ~
42835 \begin_inset space ~
42841 \begin_inset space ~
42845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42847 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42851 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42854 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42855 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42857 \begin_inset space ~
42860 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42862 \begin_inset space ~
42865 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42867 \begin_inset space ~
42871 \begin_inset space ~
42877 \begin_inset space ~
42881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42883 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42887 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42888 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42890 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42891 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42896 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42898 \begin_inset space ~
42901 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42905 \begin_inset space ~
42909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42911 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42916 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42917 when it is first configured.
42918 The default output format is
42921 \begin_inset space ~
42929 \begin_layout Subsection
42930 View (Other Formats)
42933 \begin_layout Standard
42934 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42935 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42936 actual document with an external program.
42937 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42938 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42939 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42941 All possible formats are listed in section
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42948 reference "subsec:Export"
42953 You should at least see the menu entry
42958 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42960 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42962 \begin_inset space ~
42966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42968 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42973 \begin_inset Index idx
42976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42977 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42986 \begin_layout Standard
42987 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42988 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42990 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42991 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42993 \begin_inset space ~
42996 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42998 \begin_inset space ~
43001 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43005 \begin_inset space ~
43009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43011 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43016 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43017 when it is first configured.
43020 \begin_layout Subsection
43022 \begin_inset space ~
43028 \begin_layout Standard
43029 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43030 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43033 \begin_layout Subsection
43034 Update (Other Formats)
43037 \begin_layout Standard
43038 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43039 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43042 \begin_layout Subsection
43043 View Master Document
43046 \begin_layout Standard
43047 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43063 \begin_inset space ~
43068 manual for more information on this topic).
43069 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43070 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43074 \begin_inset space ~
43078 \begin_inset space ~
43083 generates the output of the whole book, while
43087 will just output the chapter alone.
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43091 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43092 in the document settings (menu
43094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43095 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43096 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43098 \begin_inset space ~
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43108 \begin_inset space ~
43112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43114 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43118 ) or in the preferences (menu
43120 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43121 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43126 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43128 \begin_inset space ~
43131 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43133 \begin_inset space ~
43137 \begin_inset space ~
43143 \begin_inset space ~
43147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43149 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43156 \begin_layout Subsection
43157 Update Master Document
43160 \begin_layout Standard
43161 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43177 \begin_inset space ~
43182 manual for more information on this topic).
43183 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43184 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43187 \begin_layout Standard
43188 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43189 in the document settings (menu
43191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43192 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43193 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43195 \begin_inset space ~
43199 \begin_inset space ~
43205 \begin_inset space ~
43209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43211 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43215 ) or in the preferences (menu
43217 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43218 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43220 \begin_inset space ~
43223 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43225 \begin_inset space ~
43228 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43230 \begin_inset space ~
43234 \begin_inset space ~
43240 \begin_inset space ~
43244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43246 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43253 \begin_layout Subsection
43255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43257 name "subsec:Compressed"
43264 \begin_layout Standard
43265 Un/compresses the current document.
43266 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43267 compression (see the
43269 Additional Features
43271 manual for details).
43274 \begin_layout Subsection
43278 \begin_layout Standard
43279 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43282 \begin_layout Subsection
43286 \begin_layout Standard
43287 The document settings are described in appendix
43288 \begin_inset space ~
43292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43294 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43301 \begin_layout Section
43303 \begin_inset Index idx
43306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43315 \begin_layout Subsection
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43320 Spell checking is explained in section
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43327 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43334 \begin_layout Subsection
43338 \begin_layout Standard
43339 The thesaurus is described in section
43340 \begin_inset space ~
43344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43346 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43353 \begin_layout Subsection
43355 \begin_inset Index idx
43358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43365 \begin_inset Index idx
43368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43377 \begin_layout Standard
43378 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43379 the highlighted document part.
43382 \begin_layout Subsection
43388 \begin_inset Index idx
43391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43392 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43401 \begin_layout Standard
43402 Generates with the help of the program
43404 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43407 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43408 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43409 This feature is not available on Windows.
43412 \begin_layout Subsection
43418 \begin_inset Index idx
43421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43431 \begin_layout Standard
43432 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43442 to see the full filename paths.
43445 \begin_layout Subsection
43447 \begin_inset Index idx
43450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43459 \begin_layout Standard
43460 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43461 files as described in section
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43468 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43475 \begin_layout Subsection
43477 \begin_inset Index idx
43480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43493 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43511 \begin_inset Index idx
43514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43515 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43524 \begin_layout Standard
43525 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43526 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43527 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43528 -packages and programs it needs; see
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43536 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43543 \begin_layout Subsection
43547 \begin_layout Standard
43552 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43559 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43566 \begin_layout Section
43568 \begin_inset Index idx
43571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43580 \begin_layout Standard
43581 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43582 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43584 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43588 \begin_layout Standard
43592 \begin_inset space ~
43597 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43598 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43599 packages and classes found
43600 by \SpecialChar LyX
43602 \begin_inset space ~
43606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43608 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43615 \begin_layout Standard
43619 \begin_inset space ~
43624 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43629 \begin_layout Section
43631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43633 name "sec:Toolbars"
43640 \begin_layout Standard
43641 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43642 \begin_inset space ~
43646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43648 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43655 \begin_layout Standard
43656 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43657 This is described in the
43659 Additional Features
43664 \begin_layout Subsection
43666 \begin_inset Index idx
43669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43678 \begin_layout Standard
43679 \begin_inset Graphics
43680 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43688 \begin_layout Standard
43689 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43695 \begin_layout Standard
43696 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43713 \begin_inset Note Note
43716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43717 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43722 manual for more information.
43730 \begin_layout Standard
43731 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43737 \begin_layout Standard
43738 \begin_inset Tabular
43739 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43740 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43741 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43748 \begin_inset Graphics
43749 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43763 pull-down box for the environments
43776 \begin_layout Standard
43777 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43783 \begin_layout Standard
43785 \begin_inset Tabular
43786 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43787 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43788 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43789 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43813 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43850 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43873 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43880 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43889 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43903 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43919 arg "spelling-continuously"
43927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43931 Spellcheck continuously
43937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43990 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44020 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44050 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44080 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44082 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44087 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44105 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44119 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44159 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44187 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44201 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44202 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44209 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44230 Emphasize text, function of the
44231 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44239 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44241 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44247 arg "dialog-show character"
44258 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44279 Set text to noun style, function of the
44280 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44283 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44285 \begin_inset space ~
44288 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44290 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44296 arg "dialog-show character"
44307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44313 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44316 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44329 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44332 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44345 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44350 arg "textstyle-apply"
44360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44365 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44366 Format text using the current settings in the
44368 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44370 \begin_inset space ~
44373 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44408 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44410 \begin_inset space ~
44419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44428 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44442 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44456 arg "tabular-insert"
44464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44470 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44483 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44486 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44499 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44502 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44518 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44530 Toggle outline window on/off,
44532 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44548 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44560 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44575 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44587 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44600 \begin_layout Subsection
44602 \begin_inset Index idx
44605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44614 \begin_layout Standard
44615 \begin_inset Graphics
44616 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44624 \begin_layout Standard
44625 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44631 \begin_layout Standard
44632 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44636 \begin_layout Standard
44637 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44643 \begin_layout Standard
44644 \begin_inset Tabular
44645 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44646 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44647 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44648 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44649 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44685 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44712 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44739 arg "layout-toggle List"
44747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44766 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44793 arg "depth-increment"
44801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44807 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44809 \begin_inset space ~
44813 \begin_inset space ~
44822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44831 arg "depth-decrement"
44839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44845 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44847 \begin_inset space ~
44851 \begin_inset space ~
44860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44869 arg "float-insert figure"
44877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44884 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44900 arg "float-insert table"
44908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44915 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44961 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44991 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45012 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45055 arg "nomencl-insert"
45063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45071 \begin_inset space ~
45080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45089 arg "footnote-insert"
45097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45110 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45119 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45135 \begin_inset space ~
45144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45168 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45170 \begin_inset space ~
45179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45188 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45209 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45282 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45297 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45313 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45328 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45330 \begin_inset space ~
45339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45348 arg "dialog-show character"
45356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45362 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45367 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45380 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45385 arg "textstyle-apply"
45393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45398 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45399 Format text using the recent settings in the
45402 arg "dialog-show character"
45411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45420 arg "layout-paragraph"
45428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45434 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45436 \begin_inset space ~
45445 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45454 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45468 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45482 \begin_layout Subsection
45483 View/Update Toolbar
45484 \begin_inset Index idx
45487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45488 Toolbar ! View / Update
45496 \begin_layout Standard
45497 \begin_inset Graphics
45498 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45505 \begin_layout Standard
45506 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45512 \begin_layout Standard
45513 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45517 \begin_layout Standard
45518 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45524 \begin_layout Standard
45525 \begin_inset Tabular
45526 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45527 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45528 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45529 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 arg "buffer-update"
45577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45583 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45599 arg "master-buffer-view"
45607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45615 \begin_inset space ~
45624 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45633 arg "master-buffer-update"
45641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45649 \begin_inset space ~
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45671 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45686 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45687 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45688 Synchronize with Output
45694 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45705 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45722 View (Other Formats)
45728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45735 arg "update-others"
45739 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45753 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45754 Update (Other Formats)
45767 \begin_layout Standard
45769 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45770 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45776 \begin_layout Subsection
45780 \begin_layout Standard
45781 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45782 \begin_inset space ~
45786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45788 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45792 , the table toolbar
45793 \begin_inset Index idx
45796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45805 \begin_inset space ~
45810 manual and the math macro toolbar
45811 \begin_inset Index idx
45814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45827 \begin_layout Chapter
45828 The Document Settings
45829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45831 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45836 \begin_inset Index idx
45839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45840 Document ! Settings
45848 \begin_layout Standard
45852 \begin_inset space ~
45857 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45858 is called with the menu
45860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45864 You can save your document settings as default with the
45866 Save as Document Defaults
45868 button in any dialog.
45869 This will create a template named
45873 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45874 when you create a new document without
45878 \begin_layout Standard
45883 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45884 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45887 \begin_layout Standard
45888 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45889 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45890 to find the one you are looking for.
45891 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45892 the submenus of the dialog.
45894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45898 \begin_inset space \space{}
45902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45909 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45910 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45911 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45914 \begin_layout Section
45918 \begin_layout Standard
45919 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45921 Document classes are described in section
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45928 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45935 \begin_layout Standard
45939 \begin_inset space ~
45944 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45949 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45950 as a layout for a document class.
45951 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45953 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45962 \begin_layout Standard
45963 Some classes use special class options by default.
45964 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45968 and you can decide to use them or not.
45969 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45970 recommended you leave them untouched.
45975 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45976 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45981 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45983 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45989 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45990 \begin_inset Newline newline
45995 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45998 \begin_inset Newline newline
46001 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46002 distribution, see section
46007 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46009 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46022 \begin_layout Standard
46027 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46028 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46029 in the background if the child document
46030 is opened without its master.
46031 This way child documents are always compilable.
46032 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46039 \begin_inset space ~
46047 \begin_layout Standard
46048 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46059 \begin_inset Index idx
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 packages ! prettyref
46070 \begin_inset Index idx
46073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46075 packages ! refstyle
46080 for cross-references, see section
46081 \begin_inset space ~
46085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46087 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46094 \begin_layout Section
46098 \begin_layout Standard
46099 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46100 Please refer to the section
46103 \begin_inset space ~
46111 \begin_inset space ~
46116 manual for details.
46119 \begin_layout Section
46123 \begin_layout Standard
46124 Modules are explained in section
46125 \begin_inset space ~
46129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46131 reference "subsec:Modules"
46138 \begin_layout Section
46142 \begin_layout Standard
46144 \begin_inset space ~
46148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46150 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46157 \begin_layout Section
46161 \begin_layout Standard
46162 The document font settings are described in section
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46169 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46176 \begin_layout Section
46180 \begin_layout Standard
46181 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46193 \begin_inset space ~
46198 and whether it should be a
46201 \begin_inset space ~
46206 can also be specified here.
46209 \begin_layout Standard
46210 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46211 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46212 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46214 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46217 \begin_layout Standard
46220 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46223 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46224 justifies the text on screen.
46225 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46227 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46231 \begin_layout Standard
46233 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46242 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46247 \begin_layout Section
46251 \begin_layout Standard
46252 This dialog is described in sections
46253 \begin_inset space ~
46257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46259 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46266 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46273 \begin_layout Section
46277 \begin_layout Standard
46278 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46279 \begin_inset space ~
46283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46285 reference "subsec:Margins"
46292 \begin_layout Section
46294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46296 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46301 \begin_inset Index idx
46304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46305 Language ! Encoding
46313 \begin_layout Standard
46314 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46315 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46316 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46318 is always encoded in utf8).
46319 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46320 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46321 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46322 -command is not known for
46323 a particular character).
46324 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46328 \begin_layout Standard
46330 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46331 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46332 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46333 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46334 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46335 's default encoding).
46336 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46337 's Unicode support covers the
46338 characters of most scripts.
46339 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46340 using one of the traditional, or
46341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46348 , encodings is necessary.
46351 \begin_layout Standard
46353 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46355 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46358 Traditional (auto-selected)
46364 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46365 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46366 the given language(s).
46368 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46372 \begin_layout Standard
46374 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46375 If you use the option
46380 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46383 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46384 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46387 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46390 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46391 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46392 exactly one encoding.
46393 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46398 \begin_layout Standard
46400 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46401 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46407 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46408 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46412 \begin_layout Standard
46414 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46415 Finally, you can also select
46419 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46420 Note that this encoding is then used for
46425 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46426 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46430 \begin_layout Standard
46432 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46435 Do not load inputenc
46437 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46438 from automatically loading the
46445 \begin_inset Index idx
46448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46450 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46452 packages ! inputenc
46460 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46461 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46462 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46463 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46464 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46466 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46472 Traditional (auto-selected)
46479 \begin_layout Standard
46481 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46483 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46484 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46485 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46486 installation supports Unicode), choose
46487 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46488 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46489 is quite incomplete, so
46490 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46495 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46496 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46497 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46498 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46499 -commands is not used, because all
46500 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46501 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46502 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46503 , two new alternative engines
46504 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46506 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46508 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46511 \begin_inset space ~
46519 \begin_inset space ~
46527 \begin_inset space ~
46533 \begin_inset space ~
46537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46539 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46544 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46548 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46553 \begin_layout Standard
46557 \begin_inset space ~
46562 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46563 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46573 The possible settings are:
46576 \begin_layout Description
46577 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46579 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46580 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46584 \begin_inset space ~
46588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46590 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46597 \begin_layout Description
46598 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46599 format you will use.
46600 In many cases this will be
46605 \begin_inset Index idx
46608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46616 If the newer package
46621 \begin_inset Index idx
46624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46626 packages ! polyglossia
46631 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46632 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46633 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46635 this package will be used instead of
46642 \begin_layout Description
46644 \begin_inset space ~
46655 would be more appropriate.
46658 \begin_layout Description
46659 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46660 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46664 (for German texts), type in
46667 \begin_inset Newline newline
46672 usepackage{ngerman}
46675 \begin_layout Description
46676 None will not use a language package.
46677 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46680 \begin_layout Standard
46681 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46684 \begin_layout Description
46686 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46688 \begin_inset space ~
46692 \begin_inset space ~
46696 \begin_inset space ~
46703 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46709 \begin_inset Index idx
46712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46714 packages ! inputenc
46720 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46721 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46722 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46728 \begin_layout Description
46729 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46731 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46732 commands, which may result in a big
46733 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46734 -commands are needed.
46736 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46737 This is the same as the
46750 \begin_layout Description
46752 \begin_inset space ~
46756 \begin_inset space ~
46759 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46762 \begin_layout Description
46764 \begin_inset space ~
46768 \begin_inset space ~
46771 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46774 \begin_layout Description
46776 \begin_inset space ~
46779 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46782 \begin_layout Description
46784 \begin_inset space ~
46788 \begin_inset space ~
46791 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46792 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46795 \begin_layout Description
46797 \begin_inset space ~
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46804 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46808 \begin_layout Description
46810 \begin_inset space ~
46814 \begin_inset space ~
46817 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46818 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46821 \begin_layout Description
46823 \begin_inset space ~
46827 \begin_inset space ~
46831 \begin_inset space ~
46834 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46835 \begin_inset space ~
46841 \begin_layout Description
46843 \begin_inset space ~
46847 \begin_inset space ~
46851 \begin_inset space ~
46854 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46855 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46858 \begin_layout Description
46860 \begin_inset space ~
46864 \begin_inset space ~
46867 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46868 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46869 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46870 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46871 \begin_inset space ~
46875 \begin_inset space ~
46881 \begin_layout Description
46883 \begin_inset space ~
46887 \begin_inset space ~
46890 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46891 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46892 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46894 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46895 \begin_inset space ~
46899 \begin_inset space ~
46905 \begin_layout Description
46907 \begin_inset space ~
46911 \begin_inset space ~
46914 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46917 \begin_layout Description
46919 \begin_inset space ~
46923 \begin_inset space ~
46926 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46929 \begin_layout Description
46931 \begin_inset space ~
46935 \begin_inset space ~
46938 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46941 \begin_layout Description
46943 \begin_inset space ~
46946 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46949 \begin_layout Description
46951 \begin_inset space ~
46954 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46957 \begin_layout Description
46959 \begin_inset space ~
46963 \begin_inset space ~
46966 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46969 \begin_layout Description
46971 \begin_inset space ~
46975 \begin_inset space ~
46981 \begin_layout Description
46983 \begin_inset space ~
46987 \begin_inset space ~
46990 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46993 \begin_layout Description
46995 \begin_inset space ~
46999 \begin_inset space ~
47005 \begin_layout Description
47007 \begin_inset space ~
47011 \begin_inset space ~
47014 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47020 \begin_inset Index idx
47023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47030 , when using this, set the document language to
47035 \begin_layout Description
47037 \begin_inset space ~
47041 \begin_inset space ~
47044 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47049 , when using this, set the document language to
47052 \begin_inset space ~
47058 \begin_layout Description
47060 \begin_inset space ~
47064 \begin_inset space ~
47067 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47073 \begin_inset Index idx
47076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47078 packages ! japanese
47083 , when using this, set the document language to
47088 \begin_layout Description
47090 \begin_inset space ~
47094 \begin_inset space ~
47097 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47102 , when using this, set the document language to
47107 \begin_layout Description
47109 \begin_inset space ~
47113 \begin_inset space ~
47116 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47121 , when using this, set the document language to
47126 \begin_layout Description
47128 \begin_inset space ~
47131 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47134 \begin_layout Description
47136 \begin_inset space ~
47140 \begin_inset space ~
47144 \begin_inset space ~
47147 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47150 \begin_layout Description
47152 \begin_inset space ~
47156 \begin_inset space ~
47160 \begin_inset space ~
47163 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47164 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47165 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47168 \begin_layout Description
47170 \begin_inset space ~
47174 \begin_inset space ~
47180 \begin_layout Description
47182 \begin_inset space ~
47186 \begin_inset space ~
47189 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47190 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47193 \begin_layout Description
47195 \begin_inset space ~
47199 \begin_inset space ~
47202 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47208 \begin_inset Index idx
47211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47218 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47219 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47221 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47222 with the default encoding (
47224 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47230 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47231 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47236 \begin_layout Description
47238 \begin_inset space ~
47246 \begin_inset space ~
47249 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47256 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47259 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47266 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47267 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47269 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47272 \begin_layout Description
47274 \begin_inset space ~
47278 \begin_inset space ~
47281 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47287 \begin_inset Index idx
47290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47298 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47301 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47303 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47304 This used to be more comprehensive than
47307 \begin_inset space ~
47312 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47317 \begin_layout Description
47319 \begin_inset space ~
47322 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47328 \begin_inset Index idx
47331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47333 packages ! inputenc
47340 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47341 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47343 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47344 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47345 with the default encoding (
47347 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47353 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47354 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47359 \begin_layout Description
47361 \begin_inset space ~
47365 \begin_inset space ~
47369 \begin_inset space ~
47372 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47373 \begin_inset space ~
47379 \begin_layout Description
47381 \begin_inset space ~
47385 \begin_inset space ~
47389 \begin_inset space ~
47392 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47393 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47394 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47398 \begin_layout Description
47400 \begin_inset space ~
47404 \begin_inset space ~
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47411 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47412 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47415 \begin_layout Section
47417 \begin_inset Index idx
47420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47427 \begin_inset Index idx
47430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47437 \begin_inset Index idx
47440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47441 Color ! Shaded boxes
47447 \begin_inset Index idx
47450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47451 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47459 \begin_layout Standard
47460 Here you can alter the font color for the
47464 (default: black), for
47467 \begin_inset space ~
47472 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47476 (default: white) and for
47479 \begin_inset space ~
47489 sets the color back to the default.
47492 \begin_layout Standard
47493 Clicking any button showing
47501 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47502 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47503 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47504 later more quickly.
47507 \begin_layout Standard
47508 Note, if you change the
47511 \begin_inset space ~
47516 font color and use the option
47519 \begin_inset space ~
47524 in the document settings under
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47532 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47533 \begin_inset space ~
47537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47539 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47546 \begin_layout Standard
47547 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47553 \begin_layout Standard
47557 \begin_inset space ~
47566 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47569 \begin_inset space ~
47572 Code after a forced page break:
47575 \begin_layout Itemize
47576 For the page color:
47577 \begin_inset Newline newline
47584 pagecolor{color name}
47587 \begin_layout Itemize
47588 For the text color:
47589 \begin_inset Newline newline
47599 \begin_layout Standard
47600 You are restricted to one of
47636 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47643 \begin_inset space ~
47649 \begin_inset Newline newline
47652 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47653 names to refer to them:
47656 \begin_layout Itemize
47662 \begin_inset Newline newline
47667 page_backgroundcolor
47670 \begin_layout Itemize
47674 \begin_inset space ~
47680 \begin_inset Newline newline
47688 \begin_layout Itemize
47692 \begin_inset space ~
47698 \begin_inset Newline newline
47706 \begin_layout Itemize
47710 \begin_inset space ~
47716 \begin_inset Newline newline
47724 \begin_layout Standard
47725 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47728 \begin_inset space ~
47736 \begin_inset space ~
47744 \begin_layout Section
47746 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47750 \begin_layout Standard
47752 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47753 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47754 \begin_inset space ~
47758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47760 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47768 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47769 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47772 \begin_layout Standard
47774 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47775 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47777 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47780 \begin_layout Section
47784 \begin_layout Standard
47785 Here you can adjust the
47789 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47793 as described in section
47794 \begin_inset space ~
47798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47800 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47805 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47809 \begin_layout Standard
47811 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47812 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47814 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47815 of this package can be used as well.
47816 The most common one are:
47819 \begin_layout Description
47821 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47822 right Line numbers to the right margin
47825 \begin_layout Description
47827 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47828 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47832 \begin_layout Description
47834 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47835 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47838 \begin_layout Description
47840 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47841 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47844 \begin_layout Description
47846 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47848 \begin_inset space ~
47851 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47856 \begin_layout Section
47860 \begin_layout Standard
47861 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47867 \begin_inset Index idx
47870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47872 packages ! biblatex
47882 \begin_inset Index idx
47885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47897 \begin_inset Index idx
47900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47908 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47911 Sectioned bibliography
47913 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47919 \begin_inset Index idx
47922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47924 packages ! bibtopic
47934 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47935 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47939 for the generation of the bibliography.
47940 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47941 \begin_inset space ~
47945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47947 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47954 \begin_layout Section
47958 \begin_layout Standard
47959 Here you can define the
47963 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47965 \begin_inset space ~
47969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47971 reference "sec:Index"
47978 \begin_layout Section
47982 \begin_layout Standard
47983 The PDF properties are explained in section
47984 \begin_inset space ~
47988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47990 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47997 \begin_layout Section
48001 \begin_layout Standard
48002 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48003 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48009 \begin_inset Index idx
48012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48024 \begin_inset Index idx
48027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48039 \begin_inset Index idx
48042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48054 \begin_inset Index idx
48057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48069 \begin_inset Index idx
48072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48074 packages ! mathdots
48084 \begin_inset Index idx
48087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48089 packages ! mathtools
48099 \begin_inset Index idx
48102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48114 \begin_inset Index idx
48117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48119 packages ! stackrel
48129 \begin_inset Index idx
48132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48134 packages ! stmaryrd
48144 \begin_inset Index idx
48147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48149 packages ! undertilde
48154 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48157 \begin_layout Description
48158 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48159 -errors in formulas,
48160 ensure that you have this enabled.
48163 \begin_layout Description
48164 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48165 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48166 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48170 \begin_layout Description
48171 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48174 \begin_inset space ~
48186 \begin_layout Description
48187 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48190 \begin_inset space ~
48202 \begin_layout Description
48203 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48214 \begin_layout Description
48215 mathtools is used for the math commands
48251 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48258 \begin_layout Description
48259 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48261 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48270 \begin_layout Description
48271 stackrel is used for the math command
48288 \begin_layout Description
48289 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48292 \begin_layout Description
48293 undertilde is used for the math command
48301 Accents for one Character
48310 \begin_layout Section
48312 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48314 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48320 \begin_layout Standard
48322 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48323 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48326 \begin_layout Standard
48328 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48329 The float placement options
48330 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48333 are described in the section
48336 \begin_inset space ~
48340 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48342 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48350 \begin_inset space ~
48358 \begin_layout Section
48362 \begin_layout Standard
48363 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48365 Program Code Listings
48370 \begin_inset space ~
48378 \begin_layout Section
48382 \begin_layout Standard
48383 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48391 set to be used and set the
48396 The itemize environment is described in section
48397 \begin_inset space ~
48401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48403 reference "sec:Itemize"
48410 \begin_layout Standard
48411 You can furthermore specify a
48414 \begin_inset space ~
48419 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48420 command of the desired character.
48421 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48428 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48434 \begin_inset space \space{}
48438 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48448 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48449 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48452 \begin_layout Standard
48453 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48461 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48462 -packages in the preamble (menu
48465 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48466 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48469 \begin_inset space ~
48475 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48479 usepackage{textcomp}
48482 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48486 usepackage{amssymb}
48496 \begin_layout Section
48500 \begin_layout Standard
48501 Branches are described in section
48502 \begin_inset space ~
48506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48508 reference "sec:Branches"
48515 \begin_layout Section
48517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48519 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48526 \begin_layout Standard
48527 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48530 \begin_layout Description
48532 \begin_inset space ~
48536 \begin_inset space ~
48539 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48559 View Master Document
48560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48567 Update Master Document
48568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48575 menu or the toolbar.
48576 The default is set in
48578 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48579 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48581 \begin_inset space ~
48584 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48588 \begin_inset space ~
48592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48594 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48601 \begin_layout Description
48603 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48605 \begin_inset space ~
48609 \begin_inset space ~
48613 \begin_inset space ~
48616 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48621 option which is needed with some packages.
48622 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48623 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48626 \begin_layout Description
48628 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48630 \begin_inset space ~
48634 \begin_inset space ~
48637 Options offers settings for the
48645 \begin_layout Itemize
48649 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48651 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48653 \begin_inset space ~
48659 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48661 \begin_inset space ~
48665 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48671 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48673 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48674 settings for the menu
48676 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48680 \begin_inset space ~
48684 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48687 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48688 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48693 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48695 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48697 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48700 or a detailed description see section
48702 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48707 \begin_inset space ~
48713 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48717 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48721 \begin_layout Itemize
48723 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48726 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48728 determines whether so-called
48729 \begin_inset Quotes els
48733 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48737 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48739 \begin_inset Quotes els
48743 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48746 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48747 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48748 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48750 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48752 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48753 macros, you can uncheck this.
48754 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48761 \begin_layout Description
48763 \begin_inset space ~
48767 \begin_inset space ~
48770 Options offers settings for the export format
48778 \begin_inset space ~
48783 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48784 \begin_inset space ~
48787 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48791 \begin_inset space ~
48796 settings are described in detail in section
48798 Math Output in XHTML
48803 \begin_inset space ~
48812 \begin_inset space ~
48816 \begin_inset space ~
48821 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48824 \begin_layout Description
48826 \begin_inset space ~
48831 Save transient properties
48833 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48834 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48835 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48839 \begin_layout Itemize
48840 the activation of change tracking
48843 \begin_layout Itemize
48844 the output of tracked changes
48847 \begin_layout Itemize
48848 the recording of the document directory path.
48851 \begin_layout Standard
48852 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48853 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48857 \begin_layout Section
48865 \begin_layout Standard
48866 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48868 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48870 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48872 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48876 \begin_layout Standard
48877 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48878 -syntax is given in section
48879 \begin_inset space ~
48883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48885 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48892 \begin_layout Chapter
48898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48900 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48905 \begin_inset Index idx
48908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48917 \begin_layout Standard
48918 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48920 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48924 It has the following submenus.
48927 \begin_layout Section
48931 \begin_layout Subsection
48935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48936 User Interface File
48937 \begin_inset Index idx
48940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48941 Customization ! of toolbars
48947 \begin_inset Index idx
48950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48951 Customization ! of menus
48959 \begin_layout Standard
48960 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48961 interface (ui) file.
48962 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48970 \begin_layout Description
48975 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48978 \begin_layout Description
48985 the menu entries in popup context menus
48988 \begin_layout Description
48993 specifies the toolbar buttons
48996 \begin_layout Standard
48997 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48998 and edit the entries.
49001 \begin_layout Standard
49002 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49014 entries must be finished with an explicit
49039 and in the case of the
49040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49052 The syntax for the entries is:
49055 \begin_layout Standard
49056 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49085 \begin_layout Standard
49087 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49090 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49091 -functions are listed in the menu
49093 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49095 \begin_inset space ~
49103 \begin_layout Standard
49104 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49110 \begin_layout Standard
49111 For example, assuming you use the menu
49113 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49116 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49120 \begin_layout Standard
49121 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49145 \begin_layout Standard
49147 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49162 to have the sixth bookmark.
49165 \begin_layout Standard
49169 \begin_inset space ~
49174 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49175 's toolbar buttons.
49176 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49180 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49192 \begin_layout Standard
49195 Enable tool tips in main work area
49197 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49205 \begin_layout Standard
49210 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49211 should display in the menu
49213 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49215 \begin_inset space ~
49223 \begin_layout Subsection
49227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49231 \begin_layout Standard
49234 Restore window layouts and geometries
49237 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49238 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49242 \begin_layout Standard
49245 Restore cursor positions
49247 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49251 \begin_layout Standard
49254 Load opened files from last session
49256 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49260 \begin_layout Standard
49263 Clear all session information
49265 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49266 sessions (cursor positions, names
49267 of last opened documents, etc.).
49270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49274 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49279 \begin_inset Index idx
49282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49291 \begin_layout Standard
49294 Backup original documents when saving
49296 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49297 it was saved the last time.
49298 It is stored in the
49301 \begin_inset space ~
49307 \begin_inset space ~
49311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49313 reference "sec:Paths"
49317 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49320 \begin_inset space ~
49326 The backup file has the file extension
49327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49341 \begin_layout Standard
49344 Backup documents, every
49346 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49349 \begin_layout Standard
49352 Save documents compressed by default
49354 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49355 \begin_inset space ~
49359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49361 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49366 This applies to newly created documents only.
49367 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49371 Windows & work area
49374 \begin_layout Standard
49377 Open documents in tabs
49379 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49383 \begin_layout Standard
49388 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49395 \begin_inset space ~
49399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49401 reference "sec:Paths"
49405 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49412 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49413 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49414 of \SpecialChar LyX
49416 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49417 instance is created for each file.
49420 \begin_layout Standard
49423 Single close-tab button
49425 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49435 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49436 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49437 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49441 \begin_layout Standard
49442 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49450 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49451 before the change takes effect.
49459 \begin_layout Standard
49464 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49466 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49468 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49472 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49473 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49474 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49477 \begin_layout Subsection
49479 \begin_inset Index idx
49482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49491 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49498 \begin_layout Standard
49499 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49503 \begin_layout Standard
49504 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49512 This section only deals with the fonts
49516 the \SpecialChar LyX
49518 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49522 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49533 \begin_layout Standard
49534 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49551 (depends on the system) as its
49554 \begin_inset space ~
49570 \begin_layout Standard
49571 You can change the font size with the
49578 \begin_layout Standard
49583 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49588 points have the size of 1
49589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49593 \begin_inset space ~
49597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49599 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49604 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49609 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49610 \begin_inset space ~
49614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49616 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49623 \begin_layout Subsection
49625 \begin_inset Index idx
49628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49629 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49636 \begin_inset Index idx
49639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49648 \begin_layout Standard
49649 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49650 by choosing an item in the
49651 list and selecting the
49658 \begin_layout Standard
49659 By checking the option
49663 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49666 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49667 \begin_inset space ~
49671 \begin_inset space ~
49676 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49679 \begin_layout Subsection
49681 \begin_inset Index idx
49684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49693 \begin_layout Standard
49694 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49698 \begin_layout Standard
49703 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49704 This feature is described in section
49705 \begin_inset space ~
49709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49711 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49718 \begin_layout Standard
49719 Checking the option
49722 \begin_inset space ~
49726 \begin_inset space ~
49730 \begin_inset space ~
49735 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49738 \begin_layout Section
49740 \begin_inset Index idx
49743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49752 \begin_layout Subsection
49756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49760 \begin_layout Standard
49763 Cursor follows scrollbar
49765 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49769 \begin_layout Standard
49770 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49771 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49772 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49775 \begin_layout Standard
49778 Scroll below end of document
49780 is self-explanatory.
49783 \begin_layout Standard
49784 In \SpecialChar LyX
49785 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49792 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49794 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49795 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49796 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49800 \begin_layout Standard
49802 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49805 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49807 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49808 paste operations (i.
49809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49812 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49813 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49814 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49815 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49816 dissolving from insets.
49821 \begin_layout Standard
49824 Sort environments alphabetically
49826 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49829 \begin_layout Standard
49832 Group environments by their category
49834 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49837 \begin_layout Standard
49842 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49851 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
49855 \begin_layout Standard
49857 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
49860 Search drive for cited files
49862 allows \SpecialChar LyX
49863 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
49866 \begin_inset space ~
49870 \begin_inset space ~
49874 \begin_inset space ~
49878 \begin_inset space ~
49881 Content\SpecialChar ldots
49884 context menu on a citation.
49889 field determines the search pattern.
49891 \begin_inset space ~
49895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49897 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
49906 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49910 \begin_layout Standard
49911 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49916 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49917 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49921 \begin_layout Subsection
49923 \begin_inset Index idx
49926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49933 \begin_inset Index idx
49936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49937 Settings ! Shortcuts
49945 \begin_layout Standard
49950 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49952 Several binding files are available, among them:
49955 \begin_layout Description
49956 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49959 \begin_layout Description
49960 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49972 \begin_layout Description
49973 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49984 \begin_layout Standard
49985 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49990 , and binding files for special languages.
49991 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49996 \begin_inset space \space{}
50000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50008 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50009 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50010 will try to use the appropriate binding
50014 \begin_layout Standard
50015 Some binding files, like
50019 , only have a limited scope.
50020 When looking at the end of the file
50024 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50027 \begin_layout Standard
50031 \begin_inset space ~
50035 \begin_inset space ~
50040 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50041 in the selected key binding file.
50044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50048 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50053 \begin_inset Index idx
50056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50057 Key Bindings ! Editing
50065 \begin_layout Standard
50066 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50067 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50068 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50069 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50072 Show key-bindings containing
50075 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50076 Insert there for example as keyword
50077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50084 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50085 functions that contain
50086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50094 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50095 All \SpecialChar LyX
50096 functions are also listed in the file
50101 that you will find in the
50108 \begin_layout Standard
50109 For example, to add the shortcut
50117 , select the function and press the
50122 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50123 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50126 \begin_layout Standard
50127 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50128 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50130 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
50131 function names as a semicolon separated list.
50133 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50137 \begin_layout Standard
50138 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50141 \begin_layout Standard
50142 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50144 The syntax of the entries is:
50147 \begin_layout Standard
50153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50172 \begin_layout Standard
50173 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50174 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50202 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50203 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50204 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50205 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50207 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50211 , you needed to specify it as
50216 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50219 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50222 \begin_layout Subsection
50224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50226 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50231 \begin_inset Index idx
50234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50241 \begin_inset Index idx
50244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50245 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50253 \begin_layout Standard
50254 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50255 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50256 provides keyboard maps.
50257 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50258 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50261 \begin_inset space ~
50265 \begin_inset space ~
50270 and select the keyboard map file named
50277 \begin_layout Standard
50286 keyboard map and, if you use the
50290 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50293 arg "keymap-primary"
50299 arg "keymap-secondary"
50302 respectively or toggle between them with
50305 arg "keymap-toggle"
50311 \begin_layout Standard
50312 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50320 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50329 \begin_layout Standard
50330 You can also specify the mouse
50332 Wheel scrolling speed
50335 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50339 Middle mouse button pasting
50341 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50342 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50345 \begin_layout Standard
50353 \begin_inset space ~
50357 \begin_inset space ~
50362 you can select a key for zooming.
50363 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50366 \begin_layout Subsection
50370 \begin_layout Standard
50371 Input completion is described in section
50372 \begin_inset space ~
50376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50378 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50385 \begin_layout Section
50387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50394 \begin_inset Index idx
50397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50404 \begin_inset Index idx
50407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50416 \begin_layout Standard
50417 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50418 are normally determined during
50420 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50423 \begin_layout Description
50425 \begin_inset space ~
50428 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50429 's working directory.
50430 It is the default when you
50441 \begin_inset space ~
50449 \begin_layout Description
50451 \begin_inset space ~
50454 templates This directory
50455 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50456 contains the templates that are shown
50457 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50458 will be opened when you use the menu
50459 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50464 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50466 \begin_inset space ~
50470 \begin_inset space ~
50478 \begin_layout Description
50480 \begin_inset space ~
50483 files This directory
50484 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50485 will be opened when you use the
50486 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50487 contains the example files that are listed in
50490 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50499 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50501 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50503 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50509 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50511 \begin_inset Newline newline
50515 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50527 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50528 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50538 \begin_layout Description
50540 \begin_inset space ~
50544 \begin_inset Index idx
50547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50553 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50554 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50555 \begin_inset space ~
50559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50561 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50569 will be used to save the backups.
50570 \begin_inset Newline newline
50573 Backup files have the ending
50574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50584 \begin_layout Description
50586 \begin_inset space ~
50589 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50590 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50592 \begin_inset Newline newline
50599 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50605 You can edit this file with the program
50614 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50615 in its preferences under
50618 \begin_inset space ~
50624 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50629 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50631 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50632 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50638 and \SpecialChar LyX
50639 need to be running the same time.
50640 \begin_inset Newline newline
50643 The pipe is also used for the
50647 feature, see section
50648 \begin_inset space ~
50652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50654 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50659 \begin_inset Newline newline
50662 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50663 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50664 \begin_inset Newline newline
50680 \begin_layout Description
50682 \begin_inset space ~
50685 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50688 \begin_layout Description
50690 \begin_inset space ~
50693 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50694 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50695 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50698 \begin_layout Description
50700 \begin_inset space ~
50703 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50709 You only need to specify it if you are using
50713 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50715 For \SpecialChar LyX
50720 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50724 \begin_layout Description
50726 \begin_inset space ~
50729 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50730 When \SpecialChar LyX
50731 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50732 to find it on the system.
50733 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50735 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50744 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50745 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50748 \begin_layout Description
50750 \begin_inset space ~
50753 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50754 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50755 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50756 code or in the document
50758 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50760 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50761 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50762 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50763 scanned for the input files.
50764 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50765 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50767 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50768 compilation may fail for some documents.
50771 \begin_layout Section
50775 \begin_layout Standard
50776 Here you can insert your
50785 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50787 \begin_inset space ~
50791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50793 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50797 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50800 \begin_layout Section
50802 \begin_inset Index idx
50805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50806 Language ! Settings
50812 \begin_inset Index idx
50815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50816 Settings ! Language
50824 \begin_layout Subsection
50826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50828 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50835 \begin_layout Description
50837 \begin_inset space ~
50841 \begin_inset space ~
50844 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50846 You can find its actual translation status here:
50847 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50849 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50855 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50859 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50861 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50862 LaTeX Language Support
50867 \begin_layout Description
50869 \begin_inset space ~
50872 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50873 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50874 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50875 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50892 The most widespread language package is
50897 \begin_inset Index idx
50900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50907 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50909 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50910 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50911 come with the alternative
50917 \begin_inset Index idx
50920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50922 packages ! polyglossia
50927 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50928 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50934 The available selections are described in section
50935 \begin_inset space ~
50939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50941 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50948 \begin_layout Description
50950 \begin_inset space ~
50954 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50955 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50956 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50958 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50962 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50966 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50968 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50972 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50973 that is used to switch to a different language
50974 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50975 to start the package
50979 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50980 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50984 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50985 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50988 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50992 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51000 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51008 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51011 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51013 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51017 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51035 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51036 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51043 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51044 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51049 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51054 , this setting is ignored.
51059 \begin_layout Description
51061 \begin_inset space ~
51065 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51072 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51073 Use this if the language switch set in
51077 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51081 's alternative command
51085 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51086 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51089 end{otherlanguage*}
51093 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51094 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51095 command toggles the package on and off
51096 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51097 Empty by default, as
51101 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51103 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51108 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51114 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51119 , this setting is ignored.
51124 \begin_layout Description
51126 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51128 \begin_inset space ~
51132 \begin_inset space ~
51135 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51139 \begin_layout Description
51141 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51143 \begin_inset space ~
51147 \begin_inset space ~
51150 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51156 \begin_layout Description
51158 \begin_inset space ~
51162 \begin_inset space ~
51166 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51168 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51171 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51172 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51175 to the document class options
51176 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51177 rather than the language package options.
51178 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51182 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51183 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51185 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51186 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51188 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51193 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51194 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51203 \begin_layout Description
51205 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51207 \begin_inset space ~
51211 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51213 \begin_inset space ~
51217 \begin_inset space ~
51221 \begin_inset space ~
51227 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51229 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51232 this option is set,
51233 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51234 the language switch defined in
51237 \begin_inset space ~
51242 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51243 to the document language.
51244 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51245 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51248 \begin_inset space ~
51253 or if a package resets the document language.
51254 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51255 usually should be the document language).
51256 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51257 documents start with the chosen document language.
51258 When this option is not set, the
51261 \begin_inset space ~
51266 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51268 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51271 \begin_inset space ~
51281 \begin_layout Description
51283 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51285 \begin_inset space ~
51289 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51291 \begin_inset space ~
51295 \begin_inset space ~
51299 \begin_inset space ~
51305 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51309 \begin_inset space ~
51313 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51314 Set document language explicitly
51320 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51322 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51328 \begin_inset space ~
51334 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51336 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51340 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51342 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51345 the end of the document.
51346 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51351 \paragraph_spacing single
51353 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51359 \begin_layout Description
51361 \begin_inset space ~
51365 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51367 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51371 \begin_inset space ~
51375 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51377 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51379 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51383 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51386 in a language different
51387 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51389 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51392 the document language will be
51393 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51394 marked (by default with a blue
51397 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51399 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51403 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51407 \begin_layout Description
51409 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51411 \begin_inset space ~
51415 \begin_inset space ~
51419 \begin_inset space ~
51422 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51423 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51424 switched via the operating system.
51425 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51430 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51431 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51436 \begin_layout Description
51438 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51440 \begin_inset space ~
51444 \begin_inset space ~
51447 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51448 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51453 \begin_layout Description
51455 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51457 \begin_inset space ~
51461 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51463 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51467 \begin_inset space ~
51471 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51472 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51473 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51475 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51479 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51481 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51482 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51484 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51485 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51486 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51488 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51493 \begin_layout Standard
51498 means that the cursor
51499 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51500 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51501 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51506 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51507 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51511 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51513 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51514 specific case always means: move
51518 in text (even if this means:
51524 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51525 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51526 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51527 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51528 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51540 \begin_layout Standard
51542 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51547 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51548 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51549 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51553 ) when coming from the left.
51554 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51556 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51557 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51558 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51563 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51565 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51569 \begin_layout Description
51571 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51573 \begin_inset space ~
51577 \begin_inset space ~
51580 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51581 separator alignment).
51582 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51587 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51588 (static) custom character here.
51591 \begin_layout Description
51593 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51595 \begin_inset space ~
51599 \begin_inset space ~
51602 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51608 \begin_layout Subsection
51612 \begin_layout Standard
51613 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51614 \begin_inset space ~
51618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51620 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51627 \begin_layout Section
51631 \begin_layout Subsection
51633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51635 name "subsec:General-output"
51642 \begin_layout Description
51644 \begin_inset space ~
51647 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51649 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51651 \begin_inset space ~
51657 For a detailed description see section
51659 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51664 \begin_inset space ~
51672 \begin_layout Description
51674 \begin_inset space ~
51677 Options Options for the program
51681 that is used for the export format
51686 \begin_inset space ~
51690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51692 reference "subsec:Export"
51697 Possible options are listed in the
51702 \begin_inset Newline newline
51706 \begin_inset Flex URL
51709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51711 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51721 \begin_layout Description
51723 \begin_inset space ~
51727 \begin_inset space ~
51730 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51733 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51734 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51736 \begin_inset space ~
51742 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51745 \begin_layout Description
51747 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51749 \begin_inset space ~
51753 \begin_inset Index idx
51756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51763 \begin_inset Index idx
51766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51767 Settings ! Date format
51772 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51773 \begin_inset Newline newline
51777 \begin_inset Flex URL
51780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51782 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51788 \begin_inset Newline newline
51791 For example the format
51792 \begin_inset Newline newline
51796 \begin_inset Newline newline
51799 prints the date as day/month/year.
51804 \begin_layout Description
51806 \begin_inset space ~
51810 \begin_inset space ~
51813 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51814 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51817 \begin_layout Subsection
51823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51825 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51830 \begin_inset Index idx
51833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51834 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51843 \begin_layout Description
51845 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51847 \begin_inset space ~
51855 \begin_inset space ~
51859 \begin_inset space ~
51862 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51867 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51888 are used for Cyrillic.
51889 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51902 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51904 sets up in the background.
51905 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51910 \begin_layout Description
51912 \begin_inset space ~
51916 \begin_inset space ~
51920 \begin_inset space ~
51924 \begin_inset space ~
51927 options They only have an effect when the program
51931 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51934 \begin_layout Standard
51935 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51936 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51937 manuals of the applications.
51940 \begin_layout Description
51942 \begin_inset space ~
51945 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51946 \begin_inset space ~
51950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51952 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51959 \begin_layout Description
51961 \begin_inset space ~
51964 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51965 \begin_inset space ~
51969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51971 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51978 \begin_layout Description
51980 \begin_inset space ~
51983 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51984 \begin_inset space ~
51988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51990 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51997 \begin_layout Description
52003 \begin_inset space ~
52006 command Command for the program
52008 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52011 that is described in the section
52013 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52018 Additional Features
52023 \begin_layout Standard
52024 There are additionally the following options:
52027 \begin_layout Description
52029 \begin_inset space ~
52033 \begin_inset space ~
52037 \begin_inset space ~
52041 \begin_inset space ~
52046 \begin_inset space ~
52049 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52067 to separate folders.
52068 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52070 \begin_inset Index idx
52073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52080 \begin_inset Index idx
52083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52092 \begin_layout Description
52094 \begin_inset space ~
52098 \begin_inset space ~
52102 \begin_inset space ~
52106 \begin_inset space ~
52110 \begin_inset space ~
52114 \begin_inset space ~
52117 changes Removes all manually set
52123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52124 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52126 \begin_inset space ~
52131 dialog when changing the document class.
52134 \begin_layout Section
52136 \begin_inset space ~
52140 \begin_inset Index idx
52143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52152 \begin_layout Subsection
52154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52156 name "subsec:Converters"
52161 \begin_inset Index idx
52164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52173 \begin_layout Standard
52174 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52175 from one format to another.
52176 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52177 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52184 \begin_inset space ~
52189 field and press the
52194 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52198 \begin_inset space ~
52203 drop-down list, modify the
52207 field and press the
52214 \begin_layout Standard
52217 Converter File Cache
52223 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52225 Maximum Age (in days
52228 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52229 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52232 \begin_layout Standard
52233 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52234 definition, is described in the section
52245 \begin_layout Subsection
52247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52249 name "sec:File-Formats"
52254 \begin_inset Index idx
52257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52264 \begin_inset Index idx
52267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52276 \begin_layout Standard
52277 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52287 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52290 \begin_layout Standard
52291 You can also define the
52293 Default output format
52295 that is used when you use
52297 View, Update, View Master Document
52301 Update Master Document
52307 menu or the toolbar.
52310 \begin_layout Standard
52311 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52322 \begin_layout Standard
52323 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52325 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52326 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52327 This is done by specifying a
52332 More about this is described in the section
52343 \begin_layout Chapter
52344 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52346 \begin_inset Index idx
52349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52358 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52365 \begin_layout Standard
52367 \begin_inset space ~
52371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52373 reference "tab:Units"
52377 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52378 and used in this documentation.
52381 \begin_layout Standard
52382 \begin_inset Float table
52389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52390 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52408 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52416 \begin_inset Tabular
52417 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52418 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52420 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52421 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52574 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52845 scaled point (65536
52846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52913 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53037 % of original image width
53042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53126 \begin_layout Standard
53127 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53130 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53137 \begin_layout Bibliography
53138 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53139 LatexCommand bibitem
53146 The \SpecialChar LyX
53148 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53151 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53157 \begin_inset Newline newline
53161 \begin_inset Flex URL
53164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53166 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53174 \begin_layout Bibliography
53175 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53176 LatexCommand bibitem
53177 key "latexcompanion"
53182 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53184 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53185 Companion Second Edition.
53188 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53191 \begin_layout Bibliography
53192 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53193 LatexCommand bibitem
53199 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53202 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53206 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53209 \begin_layout Bibliography
53210 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53211 LatexCommand bibitem
53220 : A Document Preparation System.
53223 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53226 \begin_layout Bibliography
53227 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53228 LatexCommand bibitem
53238 The \SpecialChar TeX
53242 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53245 \begin_layout Bibliography
53246 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53247 LatexCommand bibitem
53253 The \SpecialChar TeX
53255 \begin_inset Newline newline
53259 \begin_inset Flex URL
53262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53264 https://ctan.org/topic
53272 \begin_layout Bibliography
53273 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53274 LatexCommand bibitem
53280 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53282 \begin_inset Newline newline
53286 \begin_inset Flex URL
53289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53291 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53299 \begin_layout Bibliography
53300 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53301 LatexCommand bibitem
53308 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53310 name "Documentation"
53311 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53318 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53322 \begin_inset Newline newline
53326 \begin_inset Flex URL
53329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53331 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53339 \begin_layout Bibliography
53340 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53341 LatexCommand bibitem
53348 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53350 name "Documentation"
53351 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53356 how to use the program
53358 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53362 \begin_inset Newline newline
53366 \begin_inset Flex URL
53369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53371 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53379 \begin_layout Bibliography
53380 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53381 LatexCommand bibitem
53388 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53390 name "Documentation"
53391 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53396 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53402 \begin_inset Index idx
53405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53407 packages ! biblatex
53413 \begin_inset Newline newline
53417 \begin_inset Flex URL
53420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53422 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53430 \begin_layout Bibliography
53431 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53432 LatexCommand bibitem
53439 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53441 name "Documentation"
53442 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53447 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53453 \begin_inset Index idx
53456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53464 \begin_inset Newline newline
53468 \begin_inset Flex URL
53471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53473 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53481 \begin_layout Bibliography
53482 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53483 LatexCommand bibitem
53490 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53492 name "Documentation"
53493 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53503 \begin_inset Newline newline
53507 \begin_inset Flex URL
53510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53512 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53520 \begin_layout Bibliography
53521 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53522 LatexCommand bibitem
53523 key "makeindex-man"
53529 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53532 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53542 \begin_inset Newline newline
53546 \begin_inset Flex URL
53549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53551 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53559 \begin_layout Bibliography
53560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53561 LatexCommand bibitem
53568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53570 name "Documentation"
53571 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53581 \begin_inset Newline newline
53585 \begin_inset Flex URL
53588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53590 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53598 \begin_layout Bibliography
53599 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53600 LatexCommand bibitem
53607 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53609 name "Documentation"
53610 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53615 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53617 \begin_inset Newline newline
53621 \begin_inset Flex URL
53624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53626 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53634 \begin_layout Bibliography
53635 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53636 LatexCommand bibitem
53643 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53645 name "Documentation"
53646 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53651 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53657 \begin_inset Index idx
53660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53668 \begin_inset Newline newline
53672 \begin_inset Flex URL
53675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53677 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53685 \begin_layout Bibliography
53686 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53687 LatexCommand bibitem
53694 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53696 name "Documentation"
53697 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53702 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53708 \begin_inset Index idx
53711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53713 packages ! enumitem
53719 \begin_inset Newline newline
53723 \begin_inset Flex URL
53726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53728 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53736 \begin_layout Bibliography
53737 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53738 LatexCommand bibitem
53745 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53747 name "Documentation"
53748 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53753 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53759 \begin_inset Index idx
53762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53764 packages ! fancyhdr
53770 \begin_inset Newline newline
53774 \begin_inset Flex URL
53777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53779 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53787 \begin_layout Bibliography
53788 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53789 LatexCommand bibitem
53796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53798 name "Documentation"
53799 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53804 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53810 \begin_inset Index idx
53813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53815 packages ! hyperref
53821 \begin_inset Newline newline
53825 \begin_inset Flex URL
53828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53830 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53838 \begin_layout Bibliography
53839 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53840 LatexCommand bibitem
53847 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53849 name "Documentation"
53850 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53855 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53861 \begin_inset Index idx
53864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53866 packages ! microtype
53872 \begin_inset Newline newline
53876 \begin_inset Flex URL
53879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53881 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53889 \begin_layout Bibliography
53890 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53891 LatexCommand bibitem
53898 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53900 name "Documentation"
53901 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53906 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53912 \begin_inset Index idx
53915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53923 \begin_inset Newline newline
53927 \begin_inset Flex URL
53930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53932 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53940 \begin_layout Bibliography
53941 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53942 LatexCommand bibitem
53949 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53951 name "Documentation"
53952 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53957 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53963 \begin_inset Index idx
53966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53968 packages ! prettyref
53974 \begin_inset Newline newline
53978 \begin_inset Flex URL
53981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53983 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53991 \begin_layout Bibliography
53992 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53993 LatexCommand bibitem
54000 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54002 name "Documentation"
54003 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54008 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54014 \begin_inset Index idx
54017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54019 packages ! refstyle
54025 \begin_inset Newline newline
54029 \begin_inset Flex URL
54032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54034 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54042 \begin_layout Bibliography
54043 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54044 LatexCommand bibitem
54051 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54054 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54059 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54061 \begin_inset Newline newline
54065 \begin_inset Flex URL
54068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54070 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54078 \begin_layout Bibliography
54079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54080 LatexCommand bibitem
54087 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54090 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54095 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54097 \begin_inset Newline newline
54101 \begin_inset Flex URL
54104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54106 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54114 \begin_layout Bibliography
54115 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54116 LatexCommand bibitem
54123 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54126 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54131 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54132 for Cyrillic languages:
54133 \begin_inset Newline newline
54137 \begin_inset Flex URL
54140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54142 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54150 \begin_layout Bibliography
54151 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54152 LatexCommand bibitem
54159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54162 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54167 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54169 \begin_inset Newline newline
54173 \begin_inset Flex URL
54176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54178 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54186 \begin_layout Bibliography
54187 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54188 LatexCommand bibitem
54195 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54198 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54203 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54205 \begin_inset Newline newline
54209 \begin_inset Flex URL
54212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54214 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54222 \begin_layout Bibliography
54223 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54224 LatexCommand bibitem
54231 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54234 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54239 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54241 \begin_inset Newline newline
54245 \begin_inset Flex URL
54248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54250 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54258 \begin_layout Standard
54259 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54293 \begin_inset Note Note
54296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54303 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54304 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54305 bibliography is the second one:
54313 \begin_layout Standard
54314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54315 LatexCommand bibtex
54316 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54317 options "biblio/alphadin"
54324 \begin_layout Standard
54325 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54329 \begin_layout Standard
54333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54339 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54348 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54356 \begin_inset Note Note
54359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54360 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54361 \begin_inset space ~
54365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54367 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54379 \begin_layout Standard
54380 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54381 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54387 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54388 LatexCommand printindex